Jeep Gladiator 2020 Owner's Manual

2 0 2 0

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

All-New Gladiator

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name

FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.

Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

Copyright © 2019 FCA US LLC

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................13

1

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .........................................................................................................................................16

2

3

4

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..............................................................................................................164

3

SAFETY .................................................................................................................................................................................................195

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

STARTING AND OPERATING ......................................................................................................................................................281

5

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..............................................................................................................................................................388

6

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................................436

7

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................500

8

MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................................................................................................................................510

9

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................................................................646

10

11

11

INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................................652

20_JT_OM_EN_USC

2

INTRODUCTION



INTRODUCTION ..............................................................13



HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................14





Essential Information....................................................14

Symbols...........................................................................14



ROLLOVER WARNING ...................................................14



CAMPERS ............................................................................15



WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................15



VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............15

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE



VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED......................16



KEYS .....................................................................................18



Key Fob ...........................................................................18



IGNITION SWITCH ...........................................................23







Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................................23

Vehicle On Message .....................................................24

Depleted Key Fob Battery ............................................25



REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..........26





How To Use Remote Start ............................................27

Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped...........28







To Enter Remote Start Mode........................................28

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle ............................................................................28

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The





General Information......................................................29



SENTRY KEY .......................................................................30



Vehicle.............................................................................29

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ........29







Customer Key Programming.......................................31

Replacement Keys..........................................................31



General Information......................................................31



VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .........32



To Arm The System ......................................................32

To Disarm The System .................................................33

Rearming Of The System..............................................33



DOORS ................................................................................33





Manual Door Locks.......................................................34

Power Door Locks — If Equipped .............................35







Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

(If Equipped) .................................................................36

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped.......................40

Child-Protection Door Lock System —





Rear Door Removal.......................................................45



SEATS ..................................................................................49



Rear Doors......................................................................40

Front Door Removal......................................................41









Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped...............................56



HEAD RESTRAINTS..........................................................56



Manual Front Seats........................................................49

Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................51

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat .....................................52

Rear Seat Stadium Position ..........................................55



Front Head Restraints...................................................57

Rear Head Restraints ....................................................58



STEERING WHEEL ............................................................59





Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............................59

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped......................60

3



MIRRORS .............................................................................61





Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ..................61

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ............61







Outside Mirrors .............................................................62

Power Mirrors — If Equipped.....................................63

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped....................................63

Vanity Mirrors ...............................................................64





EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................64





Headlight Switch ...........................................................64

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ..................64















High/Low Beam Switch...............................................65

Flash-To-Pass..................................................................65

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......................65

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped..................................66

Turn Signals....................................................................66

Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................67

Lights-On Reminder......................................................67

Bed Lights — If Equipped............................................67





INTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................68





Courtesy Lights..............................................................68



WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS......................69



Dimmer Controls...........................................................68

Windshield Wiper Operation ......................................69

4



CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................72





Manual Climate Control Overview ............................72

Automatic Climate Controls Overview .....................76





Climate Control Functions...........................................82

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped.........................................................................83

Operating Tips ..............................................................83





POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ...........................85



Auto-Down Feature .....................................................86

Wind Buffeting ..............................................................86





DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED............................................87







Removing The Hard Top..............................................88

Installing The Hard Top ...............................................91

Installing The Soft Top..................................................92

Removing The Soft Top................................................96





FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD

TOP — IF EQUIPPED.........................................................98







Front Panel(s) Removal ................................................98

Freedom Top Storage Bag ............................................99

Front Panel(s) Installation ..........................................102

Rear Hard Top Removal.............................................102





Rear Hard Top Installation ........................................105



DOOR FRAME .................................................................106





Door Frame Removal..................................................106

Door Frame Installation..............................................108



SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED............................................110







Raising The Soft Top ...................................................119



FOLDING WINDSHIELD ...............................................125



Lowering The Soft Top ...............................................112

Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag .........................117



Lowering The Windshield..........................................126

Raising The Windshield..............................................129



HOOD ................................................................................130







TAILGATE .........................................................................131



Opening The Hood......................................................130

Closing The Hood........................................................131



Opening.........................................................................131

Three-Position Tailgate...............................................132



Closing...........................................................................134



GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —

IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................135



Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®.........136











Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..................139

Using HomeLink®.......................................................140

Security..........................................................................140

Troubleshooting Tips..................................................141

General Information....................................................141



INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...............................................142





Storage...........................................................................142

Cupholders...................................................................148





Electrical Power Outlet ..............................................149

Power Inverters — If Equipped ...............................150



Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ..........................152



BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED......154



TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED...........................156



Tonneau Cover Installation........................................156



Tonneau Cover Removal............................................160



ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED..................162

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT

PANEL



INSTRUMENT CLUSTER................................................164





INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .............................166



Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............................165





Instrument Cluster Display Location And

Controls.........................................................................167

Oil Life Reset — If Equipped.....................................169

Off Road+ Display — If Equipped............................170

5







Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items...........170

Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items..................171

Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode Message,

And Electrical Load Reduction Actions

(If Equipped) ................................................................176



WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.........................178







Red Warning Lights ....................................................178

Yellow Warning Lights...............................................183

Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................187

Green Indicator Lights................................................189









Blue Indicator Lights...................................................191



ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...........192



White Indicator Lights ................................................190

Gray Indicator Lights..................................................191

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity ...............................................................192



EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS.......................................................................193

6

SAFETY



SAFETY FEATURES.........................................................195







AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..................................208



Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................195

Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................196

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ........208

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —





If Equipped...................................................................215

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).....................219



OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........................228







Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....................228

Important Safety Precautions ....................................228

Seat Belt Systems ........................................................229

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....................240







Child Restraints ...........................................................260

Transporting Pets ........................................................276



SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................276









Transporting Passengers ............................................276

Exhaust Gas..................................................................277

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle ..........................................................................277

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The

Vehicle...........................................................................280

STARTING AND OPERATING



STARTING THE ENGINE ..............................................281





Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......................281

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ................281







Normal Starting ..........................................................282

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ....285

If Engine Fails To Start................................................285

After Starting................................................................286





ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..............286



ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .............287



PARKING BRAKE ............................................................287



MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ............289







Shifting ..........................................................................290

Downshifting................................................................291



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED......293





Ignition Park Interlock ................................................294

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ...........294



Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .....................294



FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ...........................302



Four-Position Transfer Case.......................................302

Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ..........................305





Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models.................305

Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped ....306



Off Road+ — If Equipped ..........................................308



ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.............309



STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ..................................310





Automatic Mode..........................................................311

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

Autostop .......................................................................312

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode........313







To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........313

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........314



System Malfunction ....................................................314



STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ..................................314





Automatic Mode..........................................................315

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not









Autostop .......................................................................315

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode........316

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........317

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........317

System Malfunction ....................................................317

7



SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .............................318





To Activate....................................................................318

To Set A Desired Speed...............................................319







To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................319

To Accelerate For Passing ..........................................320

To Resume Speed ........................................................321

To Deactivate ...............................................................321





ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED.....................................................................321

























Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation.............323

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ............323

To Activate/Deactivate...............................................324

To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................................325

To Cancel.......................................................................326

To Turn Off...................................................................326

To Resume ....................................................................326

To Vary The Speed Setting ........................................327

Setting The Following Distance In ACC ..................329

Overtake Aid................................................................331

ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic

Transmission Only) .....................................................331

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu.....................332

8









Display Warnings And Maintenance .......................333

Precautions While Driving With ACC .....................335


Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ..........339



PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED.....................................................................342







ParkSense Sensors .......................................................342

ParkSense Warning Display ......................................342

ParkSense Display.......................................................342

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense..........................345







Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System.....346

Cleaning The ParkSense System ...............................346



ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......................347



PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED.....................................................................348





ParkSense Sensors .......................................................348

ParkSense Warning Display ......................................349











ParkSense Display.......................................................349

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense..........................353

Service The ParkSense Park Assist System..............353

Cleaning The ParkSense System ...............................354

ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......................354



PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ......................356



TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.........................358



REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..........................................360





Fuel Filler Cap..............................................................360

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................................361



VEHICLE LOADING........................................................362



Certification Label .......................................................362



TRAILER TOWING .........................................................363





Common Towing Definitions ....................................364

Trailer Hitch Classification.........................................366







Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) ...........................................................366

Trailer And Tongue Weight.......................................369

Towing Tips..................................................................371



RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)......................................................373



Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ........373



Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive

Models...........................................................................373



DRIVING TIPS...................................................................376



On-Road Driving Tips.................................................376



Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................377

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY



HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ................................388



ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..............388






BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................................394







FUSES .................................................................................399



Replacement Bulbs .....................................................394

Bulb Replacement........................................................396





JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...............................409




Power Distribution Center (PDC).............................400





Jack Location ...............................................................409

Spare Tire Removal ....................................................412

Preparations For Jacking ............................................415

Jacking Instructions.....................................................416







To Stow The Flat Or Spare .........................................420

Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............................422



JUMP STARTING ............................................................423





Preparations For Jump Start ......................................423

Jump Starting Procedure............................................426



IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..................................428



MANUAL PARK RELEASE............................................429



FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ......................................430

9



TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.................................432





Four–Wheel Drive Models .........................................433

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...................434



ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM (EARS) ...............................................................435



EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).................................435

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE



SCHEDULED SERVICING .............................................436







Maintenance Plan ........................................................437

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...............................440



ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................441









3.6L Engine ..................................................................441

Checking Oil Level .....................................................442

Adding Washer Fluid..................................................442

Maintenance-Free Battery ..........................................442

Pressure Washing ........................................................444

10



DEALER SERVICE ...........................................................444





Engine Oil ....................................................................444

Engine Oil Filter...........................................................446















Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................................446

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................................448

Air Conditioner Maintenance....................................449

Body Lubrication .........................................................453

Windshield Wiper Blades...........................................453

Exhaust System ...........................................................456

Cooling System............................................................457

Brake System ...............................................................462









Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................463

Transfer Case ...............................................................464

Manual Transmission — If Equipped ......................464

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ................465





RAISING THE VEHICLE.................................................466



TIRES...................................................................................466















Tire Safety Information...............................................466

Tires — General Information ....................................476

Tire Types .....................................................................482

Spare Tires — If Equipped.........................................483

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................485

Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................................486

Tire Rotation Recommendations ..............................487



DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...............................................488





Treadwear.....................................................................488

Traction Grades............................................................489



Temperature Grades ...................................................489



STORING THE VEHICLE................................................489



BODYWORK......................................................................491





Protection From Atmospheric Agents......................491

Body And Underbody Maintenance.........................491



Preserving The Bodywork..........................................492



INTERIORS .......................................................................495











Carpet Removal ...........................................................495

Seats And Fabric Parts ................................................498

Plastic And Coated Parts............................................498

Leather Parts.................................................................499

Glass Surfaces ..............................................................499

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS



VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ......................500



BRAKE SYSTEM................................................................501



WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.......501



Torque Specifications..................................................501



FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................503





3.6L Engine ...................................................................503

Reformulated Gasoline...............................................503







Materials Added To Fuel............................................503

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................................504

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............504

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications................505







MMT In Gasoline.........................................................505

Fuel System Cautions..................................................505



Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................506



FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................507



FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..........................................507



Engine ...........................................................................507



Chassis...........................................................................509

MULTIMEDIA



UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................510



CYBERSECURITY ............................................................510



UCONNECT SETTINGS..................................................511







Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 3 Settings .....................................................512


Uconnect 4 Settings .....................................................525


Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings.................................538

11



SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION.................553





Safety Guidelines.........................................................553



UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY......................554





Introduction..................................................................554

Radio Mode ..................................................................556

Media Mode..................................................................560

Phone Mode..................................................................563





UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY......................572



Introduction..................................................................572

Radio Mode ..................................................................574







Media Mode..................................................................587

Phone Mode..................................................................599



OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED............................615











Off-Road Pages Status Bar..........................................616

Pitch & Roll...................................................................617

Drivetrain......................................................................617

Accessory Gauge..........................................................618



STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ....................619



Radio Operation...........................................................619

Media Mode..................................................................619



AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...........................................620



RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES...........623



Regulatory And Safety Information .........................623

12



UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS...625





Introducing Uconnect .................................................625

Get Started....................................................................626





































Basic Voice Commands ..............................................627

Radio .............................................................................628

Media.............................................................................629

Phone.............................................................................631

Voice Text Reply..........................................................632

Climate..........................................................................633

Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped ......................635

SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) —

If Equipped...................................................................636

Register (4C/4C NAV) ...............................................636

Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) ..........637

Mobile App (4C/4C NAV).........................................637

SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV)............................638

Siri® Eyes Free.............................................................639

Using Do Not Disturb ................................................640

Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...............................641

Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ...............................642


Additional Information ..............................................644

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE



SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR

VEHICLE ...........................................................................646







Be Reasonable With Requests ....................................646



IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .........................................646



Prepare For The Appointment...................................646

Prepare A List...............................................................646





FCA US LLC Customer Center..................................647

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................647

In Mexico Contact........................................................647

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........................647





Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................................648



Service Contract ..........................................................648



WARRANTY INFORMATION.......................................649



MOPAR PARTS.................................................................649



REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...................................649





In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.......649

In Canada......................................................................650



PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...................................650

13

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the

Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, trans you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Oper ating” for further information.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple mented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents located online. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle’s warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time.

Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.

Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to

1

14 INTRODUCTION

the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased.

Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Informa tion that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims towards a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.

For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that an authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information

Consult the Table of Contents at the front of this Owner’s

Manual to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor -

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the roll over while some other vehicles may not.

higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.

Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive care fully.

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US govern ment notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more up.

likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle

INTRODUCTION 15

CAMPERS

This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in camper appli cations.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains

WARNINGS

against oper ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury, and/or death. It also contains

CAUTIONS

against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

1

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

16

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED

Access your Owner’s Information right through your

Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped).

To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect touch screen, press the Uconnect

Apps

Uconnect registration is required.

button. From there, press the

Vehicle User Guide

icon on your touchscreen. No

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User

Guide Touchscreen Icon

NOTE:

Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access the features while the available while the vehicle is in motion”.

vehicle is in motion, the system will display: “Feature not

Pre-Installed Features

• Your User Guide — Updated in real-time

• Touchscreen convenience

• Maintenance schedules and information

• Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary

• Available when and where you need it

• Customizable interface

• Multilingual

Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device in real-time, so it never goes out of date.

needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

Features/Benefits

• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio

• Enhanced search and browsing capability

• Robust NAV application (if equipped)

• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category

• Icon and symbol glossary

• Crucial driver information and assistance:

• Operating Instructions

• Warranty Information

• Fluid Level Standards

• Maintenance Schedules

• Emergency Procedures

• 911 Contact and More

NOTE:

Topics can be added to your “Favorites” for easy access in the future. Refer to “Multimedia” for more information.

2

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Key Fob

1 — Flip Key Release Button

2 — Unlock Button

3 — Lock Button

4 — Remote Start Button

5 — Panic Button

Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Keyless Enter-N-Go and a

START/STOP Ignition Button. The Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) system consists of a key fob with a mechanical key and

Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle if it is located these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;

WARNING!

Push the Mechanical Key Release button only with the key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.

CAUTION!

The electrical components inside of the key fob may be damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong electrical shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the the key fob to direct sunlight.

electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing

The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and tail gate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) by not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

pressing the appropriate button on the fob. The key fob does

NOTE:

With the ignition in ON/RUN position and with the vehicle doors open, the lock button will be disabled, and only the unlock button will be enabled. All RKE commands will be or above.

disabled once the vehicle begins moving at 2 mph (4 km/h)

To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate

Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and tailgate. This setting is adjustable through the Uconnect

Settings. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the Illu minated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights will flash twice.

NOTE:

The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the compartments (if equipped), and rear seatbacks.

door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, storage

To Lock The Doors And Tailgate

Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.


Flash Lights With Remote Lock

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the lock signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or off.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

NOTE:

Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.

Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm system acti vated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

2


The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the panic button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 2 mph (4 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is remain on.

activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE:

When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indicated on longer illuminate with a button push.

the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the fob LED will no

The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.

NOTE:

Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See information.

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further

1. Remove the back cover of the key fob by inserting a flat-blade screw driver into the slot on the bottom of the fob. Apply light pressure until the cover unsnaps being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed counter-clockwise until the battery cover can be removed.

(in the order shown below) to loosen the remaining snaps

1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points

2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot and to damage the electronic board underneath.

sliding the battery forward and upward being careful not

Battery Replacement

3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery until it is seated securely below the tabs.

4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly aligned before snapping it back in place.


Programming Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho rized dealer.

NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.

Request For Additional Key Fobs

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob other vehicle.

is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any

2

WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key never been programmed.

fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has


NOTE:

• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada following two conditions: license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opera tion.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,

Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interfer encia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interfer encia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the authority to operate the equipment.

party responsible for compliance could void the user’s


IGNITION SWITCH

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a START/STOP Ignition Button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.

The START/STOP Ignition Button has several operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position.

These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.

NOTE:

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of the START/STOP Ignition Button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side

START/STOP Ignition Button and push to operate the igni tion switch.

of the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key) against the

START/STOP Ignition Button

The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:

OFF

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices (e.g. automatic locking, alarm, etc.) are available.

ACC

• Engine is not started.

• Some electrical devices are available.

2


RUN

• Driving position.

• All electrical devices are available.

START

• The engine will start.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should or the gear selector.

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could vehicle.

operate power windows, other controls, or move the

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE:

Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Vehicle On Message

When opening the driver's door when the ignition is in the

ON/RUN mode (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF mode. In addi tion to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or

Accessory On” in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

The power window switches will remain active up to ten minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, and remove the key fob from the vehicle and

Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition is in lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless and lock the vehicle.

the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle




(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could vehicle.

operate power windows, other controls, or move the


2

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Depleted Key Fob Battery

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to follow.

the instrument cluster, which will display directions to


NOTE:

A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu minates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement.

In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob against the tion switch.

START/STOP Ignition Button and push to operate the igni -

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of

328 ft (100 m).

The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate

Control System, heated seats (if equipped), and heated steering wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40°F

(4.4°C). Refer to those sections in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmis sion to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.

Backup Starting Method

How To Use Remote Start

• Push the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine OFF.

• To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes

(timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consec utive timeouts.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Gear selector in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• Panic button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event


• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing

• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

• All removable doors must not be removed

• Malfunction indicator light not illuminated

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide

(CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon death when inhaled.

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or

• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the

Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

2


Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.

Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the

Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote

Start mode.

• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

the one time push of the Remote Start button for two seconds

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP Ignition Button.

the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active —

Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP Ignition Button.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Controls may activate the heated seats (if equipped) and heated steering wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).

These features will stay on through the duration of Remote

Start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.













2





NOTE:



SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate from another vehicle.

the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained

After switching the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addi tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indi cates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to tronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.

start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec -

If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Customer Key Programming

Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer.

Replacement Keys

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob other vehicle.

is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any

CAUTION!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended to prevent theft and/or damage.

• Always remember to cycle the ignition to OFF to prevent battery drainage.

NOTE:

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key never been programmed. fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has


When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.












2





NOTE:



VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If something trig gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the security light in the instrument cluster will flash.

park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF posi tion. Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And

Operating" for further information.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in the same exte rior zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive information.

• Push the lock button on the key fob.

Entry" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further

3. If any doors are open, close them.

NOTE:

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock door handle (if equipped).

Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting

To Know Your Vehicle" for further information.

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm.


If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle Security

Alarm will rearm itself.

DOORS

2

CAUTION!

Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.


Manual Door Locks

All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.

Manual Door Lock

NOTE:

The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the compartments.

door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, and storage

WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle.

• When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in the OFF position and remove the key from the vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.




• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and rear ward to unlock the doors.

1 — Lock Button

2 — Unlock Button

Power Door Lock Switch


WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when you park and exit the vehicle.

• When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in the OFF position and remove the key from the vehicle.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.




• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

2


Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped)

The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa tion.

• The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive

Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach (Low

Beams, License Plate Lamp, Position Lamps) for which ever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/ snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock time.

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

To Unlock From The Driver Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5

m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab a hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5

m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference

Doors 1st Press”).

setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob

In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature position.

which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF


FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a

Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect system, the key protection described in this section remains active/functional.

NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true: operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected

• A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5

m) of a Passive Entry door handle).

2


• The doors are manually locked using the door lock levers.

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the power door lock switch and then close the doors.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5

m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors.

NOTE:

When pushing the door handle lock button, DO NOT grab the door handle. This could unlock the door(s).

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, the driver must wait three seconds before locking or unlocking the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow the driver to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System, the key protection described in “Preventing Inadvertent

Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle” remains active/functional.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted.
















NOTE:



2


Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automati cally when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).

The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer.

Please see an authorized dealer for service.

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.

Child Protection Door Lock Function

NOTE:

• When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle, even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After engaging or disengaging the Child-Protection Door

Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel), roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.


WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from is engaged (locked).

the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock system

NOTE:

Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effec tive engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the there is no one left inside.

vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to check that

Front Door Removal

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide.

This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

Door Removal Warning Label

WARNING!

• All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road

Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

• Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in the event of an acci dent.

• Assistance to remove doors may by required due to the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.

2


CAUTION!

• Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88

ft·lb / 8 N·m). Refer to

“Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

• Do not over-tighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the vehicle’s parts will occur.

NOTE:

When front doors are removed, the message “Blind Spot

Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in the instru ment cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also be unavailable.

To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

NOTE:

The hinge nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin located under the rear seat.

Hinge Pin Nut

3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the instru ment panel by sliding the plastic panel along the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are detached.


4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring harness.

2

Wiring Access Door

NOTE:

Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.

Closed Wiring Harness

1 — Locking Tab

2 — Wiring Harness Lever


5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into the open position.

7. With the door in the open position, remove the check bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside (using a

#T40 Torx head driver).

NOTE:

Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier re-installation.

Open Wiring Harness

1 — Wiring Harness Lever

2 — Wiring Connector

6. With the wiring harness open, pull downward on the wiring connector to unplug. Unhook the wire harness strap from the hook on the bodyside door opening. Store the wiring connector in the lower door basket of the door.

Door Check

8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of another person, to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.


To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the reverse order.

NOTE:

The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. When rein stalling the door check arm attachment bolt, bolt torque

38 N·m.

should be between 11.76

ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9

ft·lb /

Rear Door Removal

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection they can provide.

This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

Door Removal Warning Label

WARNING!

• All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road operation with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road

Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

• Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in the event of an acci dent.

• Assistance to remove doors may by required due to the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.

2


CAUTION!





To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

NOTE:

The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin under the rear seat.

Hinge Pin Nut

3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.

4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door from the bottom of the B-Pillar.


5. Unplug the wiring connector.

NOTE:

Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged. Unhook the wire harness strap from the hook on lower basket of the door.

the bodyside door opening. Store the wire connector into the

2

Wiring Access Door

Wiring Connector


6. With the door in the open position, remove the check bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside (using a

#T40 Torx head driver).

NOTE:

Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier rein stallation.

Door Check

7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of another person, to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the reverse order.

NOTE:

The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling. When rein stalling the check arm attachment bolt, bolt torque should be between 11.76

ft·lb / 16 N·m and 27.9

ft·lb / 38 N·m.

CAUTION!





SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a colli sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Manual Front Seats

Front Seat Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using


body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Adjustment Bar Location

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

2


Manual Seat Height Adjustment

The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be neces sary to achieve the desired position.

Front Seatback Recline

To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean forward or rearward, depending on the direction you would like the tion is reached and the seatback will lock into place.

seatback to move. Release the strap when the desired posi -

Seat Height Adjustment

Recline Strap

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a result in serious injury or death.

collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could


Lumbar Support

The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on the outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

Lumbar Support Control Knob

Heated Seats — If Equipped

The Heated Seat Control Buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen and also in the

Climate Control touchscreen menu.

Heated Seat Control Buttons

• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.

• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the

MED setting on.

• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO setting on.

• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the heating elements off.

2


NOTE:

• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with Remote Start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the tures, especially if used for long periods of time.

seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera -

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat

WARNING!

Seatback is not intended to be used for storing cargo when folded flat. Seatback only folds to allow access to the cargo area behind the seat. Vehicle should not be seatback.

operated with unsecured cargo on the second row folded

The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be folded flat to access the storage area behind the seat. The seat bottom can also be lifted into the Stadium Position to create more storage space on the rear floor, and provide access to the underseat storage this section for more information.

bins (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Seat Stadium Position” in

NOTE:

• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

• The center head restraints must be in the lowest position to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in killed.

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.



Folding The Rear Seats

To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap located on the upper outboard side of the rear seat. The seat and the head restraint fold simultaneously.

NOTE:

Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright position using for folding.

the vehicle key. Each seatback must be unlocked to release

2

Release Strap Locations


Rear Seat Folded Flat

To raise the seatback to the proper position, manually lift the seatback until it locks into place. To return the head restraint to the proper position, manually lift up until it locks into place. If interference from the cargo area behind the seat prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi culty returning the seats to their proper position.

NOTE:

• The vehicle is equipped with stow clips located on the lower trim, next to the rear seats. Use these clips to hold the folded and raised.

seat belt out of the path of the seat back when it is being

• You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply will return to its normal shape over time.

opening the seats to the open position, the seat cushion

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. Perform a “push - pull - push” check to confirm the seat is fully locked. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. A red indicator on the pull strap will be displayed if the seat could cause serious injury.

seatback is not securely locked. An improperly latched

Rear Seat Stadium Position

The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward into the Stadium

Position to create more storage space on the vehicle’s floor, and to access the under seat storage bins (if equipped).

To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:

1. Lift upward on each section of the seat bottom.


2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the Stadium Position.

2

Stadium Position

To return the seat bottom to the normal position, push down ward on the raised seat bottom.

Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)


Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped

The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head restraint and pull it forward.

Rear Seat Armrest

NOTE:

The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.

Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause


Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. The release button does not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go, then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Front Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed compartment.

head restraints in a location outside the occupant

(Continued)

2


WARNING!

(Continued)

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the vehicle or occupying a seat.

reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the

NOTE:

Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incor rect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

Rear Head Restraints

The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an adjustable, removable center head restraint.

To fold down the outboard head restraints, push the button located on the outboard side of the head restraint.

Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints

To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place.

To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the adjust ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push down on the head restraint.

To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.

Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.

To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height using the adjustment button. Refer to child seat tether routing.

“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information on

NOTE:

Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the center console when folding the seat down.

WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head restraints installed while passengers are occupying the without the head restraints installed are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed compartment.

head restraints in a location outside the occupant

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the vehicle or occupying a seat.

reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the


STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

The Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column feature allows the steering column to tilt upward or downward, and lengthen or shorten the steering column. The Tilt/Telescoping lever is located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever

To unlock the steering column, push the Tilt/Telescoping lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering desired.

column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as

2


To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.

To lock the steering column in position, pull the Tilt/Tele scoping lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the warning may result in serious injury or death.

driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that will warm the steering wheel in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.

• Push the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with Remote Start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insu lates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

The Inside Day/Night Mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from other vehicles can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night posi tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind shield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The Automatic Dimming Mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from other vehicles.

NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.

2


Automatic Dimming Mirror

The Automatic Dimming feature defaults to on at every igni tion cycle, and can be turned on or off through the Uconnect

“Controls” button on the touchscreen.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Outside Mirrors

The Outside Mirrors are located on the front driver and passenger side doors, and are adjusted manually or by power adjustment (if equipped).

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside Mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Outside Rearview Mirror

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The Power Mirror controls are located on the door panel next to the door handle.


The Power Mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the Power Mirror Control Switch, push any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

The Heated Mirrors feature helps to melt frost or ice.

This feature will be activated whenever the rear window defroster (if equipped) is activated. Refer to

“Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

2

Power Mirror Control Switch


Vanity Mirrors

Vanity Mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward.

instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Vanity Mirror

Headlight Switch

The Headlight Switch is located on the left side of the instru ment panel. This switch controls the operation of the head lights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if equipped),

Headlight Switch

Rotate the Headlight Switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the Headlight Switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light operation.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated posi tion below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active when the

Low Beams are not on, and when the vehicle is shifted into


any position other than PARK (Automatic Transmission), or when the vehicle begins to move (Manual Transmission).

NOTE:

The DRLs, on the same side of the vehicle as the active turn signal, will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in ating.

operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not oper -

High/Low Beam Switch

The High/Low Beam Switch is located within the Multifunc tion Lever on the left side of the steering wheel. High beam headlights can be used for improved visibility in low lit areas when there is no oncoming traffic. Otherwise, it is recom mended to use the low beam headlights to reduce glare to other vehicles.

With the headlight switch activated, push the Multifunction

Lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The lever will return to the centered position.

To return the headlights to low beam, pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the lever toward the instrument panel.

Multifunction Lever

Flash-To-Pass

The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the high beam headlights temporarily to signal another vehicle of a passing occurrence. Pull and hold the Multifunction Lever to activate

Flash-To-Pass feature will deactivate.

the Flash-To-Pass feature. When the lever is released, the

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

The Automatic Headlight System will turn the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for

2


automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the head lights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of the vehicle below the headlights. When activated, these lights add illu mination directed at the driving surface to aid in poor visi bility conditions.

To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking lights or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn the front fog lights off.

Front Fog Light Switch

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper oper ation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would


Lane Change Assist — If Equipped

The Lane Change Assist feature will flash the turn signal (left or right) three times to indicate to other drivers that you are changing lanes. Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal

(right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

Lights-On Reminder

The Lights-On Reminder feature will identify if the head lights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the igni tion is turned OFF; a chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.

Bed Lights — If Equipped

The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo area. Bed lights are turned on by pushing the bed light switch located on the lower half of the headlight switch.

Bed Light Switch

A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights off.

The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illu minated Entry feature.

2


INTERIOR LIGHTS

Courtesy Lights

The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when the front doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer controls on the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.

headlight switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the

The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be turned turn the light off.

on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second time will

When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as “Party” periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended

Dimmer Controls

The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Dimmer Controls

Interior Courtesy Lights

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the adjust the interior and ambient light levels.

instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column; it operates the multiple switch, located at the end of the lever.

wiper options. The front wipers are operated by rotating a


Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the

2

Front Wiper Control

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever


CAUTION!

In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent posi tion for one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.

Intermittent Wiper Control

NOTE:

The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the will be doubled.

vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold until desired spray is reached. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will resume.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield defroster before and during windshield washer use.

during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the


Mist Feature

Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; there fore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

2

Mist Control


CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.

throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the

Manual Climate Control Overview

The Manual Climate Controls System is an air conditioning and heating system designed to make the vehicle comfort able in all types of weather.

Manual Climate Controls

Specific instructions on how to adjust the heat and air condi tioning settings are detailed in the following Manual Climate

Control Descriptions chart.


Manual Climate Control Descriptions

Icon

A/C Button — If Equipped

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning. An LED illuminates when the A/C system is engaged.

Description

MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped

Turn the temperature control knob to the MAX A/C (Air Conditioning) position to engage the coldest temperature setting.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the

Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.

knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures.

2


Icon

Panel Mode

Bi-Level Mode

Description

Blower Control

Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.

Modes Control

Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Icon

Floor Mode

Mix Mode


Description

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

2

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Front Defrost Mode

Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.


Automatic Climate Controls Overview

The Automatic Climate Control System is designed to make the vehicle feel comfortable in all types of weather. The Automatic

Climate Controls system allows you to adjust heat and air conditioning settings by pressing buttons on the touchscreen.

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls


2

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Specific instructions on how to adjust the heat and air conditioning settings are detailed in the following Automatic Climate

Control Descriptions chart.


Automatic Climate Control Descriptions

Icon

MAX A/C Button

turns off.

Description

Press to change to the coldest setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again causes the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator

NOTE:

The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

AUTO Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.

Toggling this button causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.

Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

Icon


Description

Front Defrost Button

Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield system returns to the previous setting.

and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate

Rear Defrost Button

Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.

Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons

Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or

2


Icon

Faceplate Knob

Touchscreen

Buttons

Description

SYNC Button

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature

SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in

NOTE:

The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.

Blower Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the

•

Faceplate:

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

•

Touchscreen:

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Modes Control

Press the button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.


Icon

Panel Mode

Description

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Floor Mode

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

2

Mix Mode Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button

This button turns the Climate Control System off.


Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.

When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow or Floor modes.

mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level,

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.

• If A/C performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radi ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if condi tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.

On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the

Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting control button to blink and then turns off.

to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati cally maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the tion automatically.

greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func -

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable


feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be mode.

turned off when the system is being used in the manual

Operating Tips

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT

2


Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during window fogging.

Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air, with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system damage when the system is started again.

lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.

Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating warm water.

elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the wind shield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months,

Cabin Air Filter

The Climate Control System filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

Operating Tips Chart

WEATHER

Hot Weather And Vehicle

Interior Is Very Hot

Warm Weather

Cool Sunny

Cool & Humid Conditions

Cold Weather

CONTROL SETTINGS

Set the mode control to ,

on, and blower on high.

Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort.

Turn on and set the mode control to the position.

Operate in position.

Set the mode control to and turn on to keep windows clear.

Set the mode control to the

position. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to the position.


POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

The power windows feature allows for movement of the windows with the push of a button. The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the window and pull upward to close the window.

climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the

The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window. The bottom left switch controls the left rear window and the bottom right switch controls the right rear window.

2

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children,


Power Window Switches

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Window Switches

2 — Driver And Passenger Rear Window Switches

3 — Window Lockout Switch

NOTE:

• The power window switches will remain active for up to

10 minutes after ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

• There are window switches located on the rear of the center console for the rear passenger windows.

Auto-Down Feature

The driver door power window switch and the front passenger door power window switch have an Auto-Down release and the window will go down automatically.

feature. Push the window switch down, past the detent, and

To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly, without going past the detent, and release it when you want the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the

Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window opening.


DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top system will be provided in a separate box located in the bed of the vehicle for shipping purposes only.

NOTE:

The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently.

Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops being installed at the same time.

For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the necessary tools required for the operations described in the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.

Provided Tools

1 — #T50 Torx Head Driver

2 — #T40 Torx Head Driver

3 — 15 mm Socket

4 — Ratchet

2


Removing The Hard Top

1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)

Removal” in “Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard

Top — If Equipped” for removal instructions.

2. Open both doors.

3. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, remove the Torx head fastener that secures the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front door) on each side.

4. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft trim panel attached by the hook-and-loop fastener.

Interior Soft Trim Panel (If Equipped)

5. Remove the two Torx head fasteners that secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside rearward of the back doors) using the #T50 Torx head driver.

Torx Head Fastener Location — Left Side Shown

6. Remove the four Torx head fasteners that secure the hard top to the back of the vehicle cab using the #T50 Torx head driver.


7. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove the plastic cover by pushing on the side of the cover and sliding it off.

NOTE:


2

Torx Head Fastener Locations

Step Seven


8. To release the wire harness, pull back on the red latch, then push down on the black button while pulling the harness out.

Pull Back On Red Latch

Push Black Button To Release

9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install edge protectors and place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage.

CAUTION!

• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires, building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.

For optional Mopar accessory roof racks, refer to “Roof

Luggage Rack” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside, or fully removed.

• The removal of the hard top requires four adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the hard top.

Installing The Hard Top

NOTE:

If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for removal procedures.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary.

2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order.


NOTE:

When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:

• Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an even gap on both sides.

• Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners to ensure they are properly secured.

3. Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and across the back.

NOTE:

The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 155 ratchet.

in-lb +/- 22 in-lb (17.5

N·m +/-

2.5

N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and

2

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the retainers will occur.


Installing The Soft Top

NOTE:

• The following procedures are for first time set up only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top — If

Equipped” in this section.

• A visual instruction sheet is also included with the vehicle that details the procedure below.

1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal:

• Right and left side door frames

• Rear belt rail

• Eight door frame attachment Torx head fasteners

• Right and left side quarter panel cover assemblies

• Rear window

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Removing The Hard Top” in this section.

3. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle. Secure the belt rail using the six fasteners with the provided below for recommended torque specifications.

#T50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the table

Torque

Specification For

Torx Fastener

119.5

in-lbs

13.5

N·m

Maximum

150.5

in-lbs

17.0

N·m

Minimum

106.2

in-lbs

12.0

N·m

CAUTION!


1 — Rear Fasteners

2 — Corner Fasteners

Belt Rail Fasteners

4. Remove the storage cover on the quarter trim. Use the emergency key blade to pry the cover open.


5. Tuck the wire harness inside the storage compartment.

2

Correct Placement Of Wire Harness

Pry Open Storage Cover


NOTE:

Ensure the wire harness is not tucked under the belt rail or between the belt rail and the door rail.

Incorrect Placement Of Wire Harness

6. Install the door frames. Start with both front doors, followed by both rear doors. Refer to “Door Frame Instal lation” in this section for instructions and appropriate torque specifications for the door frame Torx head fasteners.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to the soft top or vehicle.

7. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This bag should be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover for ship ping only.

8. Ensure the top is secured with the provided hook-and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft top onto the of the soft top) with the rear door frames.

rear of the cab. Line up the locater pins (one on each side

9. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, install and tighten the Torx fasteners by turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the following table for recommended torque specifica tions. Repeat on the opposite side.


CAUTION!

Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.

2

Soft Top In Place

Torque


Torx Fasteners

119.5

in-lbs

13.5

N·m

Step Seven

Maximum

150.5

in-lbs

17.0

N·m

Minimum

106.2

in-lbs

12.0

N·m


10. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the Sunrider® position, ensure the top is secured with the provided hook-and-loop fasteners. For instructions on how to raise the soft top, refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section.

Removing The Soft Top

1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section.

CAUTION!


2. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head fasteners on the inside of each top mechanism.

Secured Top In Sunrider® Position

Step Two


3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport bar and trim. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry location.

4. Remove the door frames. The rear door frames must be removed before the front door frames. Refer to “Door

Frame Removal” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for removal instructions.

5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head fasteners on both rear corners and the back of the cab, then remove the belt rail.

NOTE:

Folding down the rear seats is recommended to provide easier access to the fasteners.

1 — Rear Fasteners

2 — Corner Fasteners

Belt Rail Fasteners

2


FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP

— IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires, building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.

For information on optional Mopar accessory roof racks, refer to “Roof Luggage Rack” in this section.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the front header, sport bar, and body side, or fully removed.

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door, or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.

Front Panel(s) Removal

NOTE:

The left side panel must be removed before removing the right side panel.

1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.

2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel (one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking them from the roof.

Roof Panel Lock Locations

3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the top of the windshield.

Header Panel Latch Locations

1 — Header Panel Latches

2 — Unlatched Position

4. Remove the left side panel.

5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right side panel.


Freedom Top Storage Bag

Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to two compartments.

store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag contains

Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so the loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.

NOTE:

• Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom Top bag.

• There is a pouch located on the front of the bag to store the hard top edge protector that is used when the hard top is not installed on the vehicle.

2


1. Insert the left side Freedom Top panel into the bag with the latches facing upward.

2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is laying flat).

Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward

Fold Divider Over Left Panel

3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag with the latches facing downward.


4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom Top bag closed.

2

Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward

NOTE:

Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag.

Storage Bag Closed

5. Store the Freedom Top bag in a safe location.


Front Panel(s) Installation

1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole, followed by the left side panel, making sure there is no overhang.

Make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body.

2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order.

NOTE:

To prevent water leaks, the seals and Freedom Top Panels should be clear of any dust and debris prior to reinstallation.

Rear Hard Top Removal

1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)

Removal” in this section.

2. Open both front doors.

3. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and ratchet, remove the two Torx head fasteners that secure the hard side.

top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front doors) on each

Torx Head Fastener Location — Left Side Shown

4. If equipped, remove the rear lower interior soft trim panel attached by a hook-and-loop fastener.


6. Remove the four Torx head fasteners that secure the hard top to the back of the vehicle cab using the #T50 Torx head driver.

2

Interior Soft Trim Panel (If Equipped)

5. Remove the two Torx head fasteners that secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside rearward of the back doors) using the #T50 Torx head driver.

Torx Head Fastener Locations


7. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove the plastic cover by pushing on the side of the cover and sliding it off.

NOTE:


Pull Back On Red Latch

Step Seven

8. To release the wire harness, pull back on the red latch, then push down on the black button while pulling the harness out.

Push Black Button To Release

9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install the edge protectors and place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage.

CAUTION!

The removal of the hard top requires four adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the hard top.

Rear Hard Top Installation

NOTE:

If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in this section for removal procedures.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary.

2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order.


NOTE:

When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:

• Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an even gap on both sides.

• Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners to ensure they are properly secured.

3. Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and across the back.

NOTE:

The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 155 ratchet.

in-lb +/- 22 in-lb (17.5

N·m +/-

2.5

N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and

2

CAUTION!



DOOR FRAME

WARNING!

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors removed as you will lose the protection that they off-road operation only.

can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:

• Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

Door Frame Removal

NOTE:

The rear door frames must be removed first, followed by the front door frames.

1. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver and ratchet, loosen the Torx head fasteners located on the underside of each door hinge (two per door).

Door Frame Torx Head Fastener Locations


2. Once all the way loosened, remove the Torx head fasteners by pulling downward.

NOTE:

The fasteners will not fall out once completely loose, as they are held in place by an internal mechanism.

Remove Fasteners From Below Frame

3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.

Step Three

4. Store the fasteners in a secure location.

5. Repeat the procedure on the front door frame.

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door and/or door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

2


Door Frame Installation

NOTE:

The door frames (if equipped with a soft top) can be installed when the doors are attached or removed.

1. Install the front door frame first.

2. Ensure the windshield is in the “up” position. Carefully place the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx head fasteners (two for each door).

3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the door frame, and insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten.

Refer to the following table for the appropriate torque specifications for the door frame fasteners.

Tighten Fasteners

Torque


Torx Fasteners

8.8

in-lbs

12 N·m

Maximum

11.0

in-lbs

15 N·m

Minimum

6.6

in-lbs

5 N·m

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened.


4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side, just behind the rear door opening.

5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the rear belt rail and the rear of the front door frame, making sure the rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.

Position Of Rear Frame On Front Frame

6. Insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with the

#T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten. Refer to the previous table for the appropriate torque specifica tions for the door frame fasteners.

2

Position Of Frame Above Belt Rail


SOFT TOP — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• The fabric quarter panel cover assemblies, rear window, and fabric top are designed only for protec tion against the elements. Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch points when installing and removing the soft top. The get caught in-between.

side bows may cause serious injury if fingers or hands

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up.

This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the

below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains.

top can then be installed.

If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or

CAUTION!

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.

Window scratches and wax build up may result.

• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below

41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.

Window and top damage may occur.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in

“Bodywork” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.

• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing. Damage to the top may result.

(Continued)


CAUTION!

(Continued)

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains, or mildew on the top material:

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

2


Lowering The Soft Top

1 —#1 Bow

2 —#2 Bow

3 — #3 Bow

4 — #4 Bow

5 — #5 Bow

Side View Top And Components

6 — Rear Window Vertical Retainer

7 — Quarter Panel Cover Assembly

8 — Quarter Panel Lower Retainer

9 — Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer

Remove The Rear Window:

1. Use the two straps located on the bottom of each side of the rear window to remove the right and left vertical retainers, as well as the lower center retainer.


2

Remove Lower Center Retainer

Step One (Right Side Shown)


2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it outward in either direction until it is completely separate from its retainer.

Do not pull downward while removing the rear window. Damage to the retainer could result.

Store the rear window in the soft top rear window storage bag.

Refer to “Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag” in this section for further information.

Remove The Right And Left Quarter Panel Cover Assem blies:

1. Starting with either side, start to disengage the quarter panel cover assembly from the bottom by pulling the fabric at the bottom upward.

2. With two hands, grasp the front of the quarter panel cover assembly and pull outward to disengage it from its retainer on the door frame.

Remove Rear Window

Step Two

3. Pull the quarter panel cover assembly up and out from the bottom, then pull it down and away from the vehicle to remove.


Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider® Position:

1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies, move to the front of the vehicle.

2. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.

3. Release the header latches from the crossbar by pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is fully disen gaged from its receiver.

2

Step Three

4. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter panel cover assembly. Store the quarter panels in the soft top rear window storage bag. Refer to “Soft Top Rear Window

Storage Bag” in this section for further information.

CAUTION!

Quarter windows and rear window must be either all in or all out.

Step Three


4. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1 Bow of the soft top to begin the operation. It is best to utilize two people for this procedure.

5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to fold the soft top rearward.

Fold Soft Top Rearward

Step Four

NOTE:

Secure the top in this position by using the two hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the center console.


Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag

To safely store the soft top rear window, proceed as follows:

NOTE:

The rear belt rail, once removed from the rear window,

does not

store in the soft top rear window storage bag.

1. With the bag opened completely, fold the fabric divider downward and lay the rear window in the bottom of the bag.

2

Secured Top In Sunrider® Position

Step One


2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear window.

3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly all the way to the right side and the second quarter panel cover assembly on the left side. Secure both using the two hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.

NOTE:

The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked “1” and “2” on the inside of the panel assembly.

Step Two

Step Three

1 — Right Quarter Panel Assembly

2 — Left Quarter Panel Assembly

4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.


Raising The Soft Top

1. From the Sunrider® Position, remove straps if previously secured.

2

Step Four

Securing Strap

CAUTION!



2. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the front of the vehicle, manually guiding the top into the closed position.

Fold Soft Top Toward Front Of Vehicle

Lower Top Into Closed Position

3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.


4. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the hook, locking the latch into place.

2

Step Three Step Four

5. Repeat steps three and four on the other side.


Install The Right And Left Quarter Panel Cover Assem blies:

1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover assembly up into the retainer.

2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of the cover assembly (toward the front of the vehicle) starting at the top, and working downward.

Step One

Step Two

NOTE:

It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged before the vehicle resumes motion.

3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front corner of each quarter panel cover by pressing firmly.


Install The Rear Window

1. From either side, guide the rear window into the retainer while keeping the window level.

2

Quarter Panel Hook-And-Loop Fastener

Step One


2. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the rear window beginning on the left side of the vehicle and working toward the center. Then, move to the right side of the until the rear window is secured in the lower retainer.

vehicle and continue from the center, working to the right

3. Engage the vertical retainers up the right and left side of the rear window.

Engage Vertical Retainers (Left Side Shown)

Step Two

4. Tuck the rear window under the soft top fabric and press firmly.

Tuck Rear Window Under Soft Top Fabric

5. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and left corners.

CAUTION!

Quarter windows and rear window must be either all in or all out.


NOTE:

For information on removing your soft top, refer to

“Removing The Soft Top” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle”.

FOLDING WINDSHIELD

The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural element that can provide some protection in some accidents.

The windshield also provides some protection against weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects.

Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down, as you lose the protection this structural element can provide.

If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be folded down. However, the protection afforded by the wind shield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range windshield folded down.

operation preferred if you are driving off-road with the

2


Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its removal is completed and before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down.

Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for a requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.

replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law

WARNING!

Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury:

• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.

• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely fastened, either up or down.

• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all times when the windshield is down.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all asso ciated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure to from providing you and your passengers’ protection in some accidents.

follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle

• If you remove the doors, store them outside the vehicle.

In the event of an accident, a loose door may cause personal injury.

Lowering The Windshield

1. Before completing the steps below:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, the top

MUST

be lowered, and the door frames must be removed prior to lowering the windshield.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, the the windshield.

• Refer to the “Soft Top,” “Door Frame,” and “Freedom

Top” instructions in this section for more information.

Freedom Panels

MUST

be removed prior to lowering

CAUTION!

Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the vehicle’s header seal.

2. Manually remove the protective caps over the windshield wiper hex bolts.


4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun visors.

5. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, remove the four Torx head fasteners located along the interior of the windshield.

2

Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.

Interior Torx Head Fastener Locations

NOTE:

Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.


6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the footman loop bumpers (if equipped).

1 — Washer Nozzle

2 — Bumper

3 — Footman Loop

Footman Loop Bumpers

7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman loops on either side of the hood and on the shield in place.

windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind -

CAUTION!

Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could result.

ACC/FCW Sensor Protective Cover — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover that is to be used whenever the windshield is folded down in order to protect the ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover, follow the instructions below:

1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to the header.

2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers the opening.

3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.

NOTE:

Be sure to remove the cover before returning the windshield to the normal position. Store the cover in the cargo area.


Cleaning Instructions

During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can accu mulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a micro fiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and inside cover, being careful not to damage or scratch the module.

Raising The Windshield

1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the lowered position.

2. Raise the windshield.

3. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, reinstall the four Torx head fasteners located along the interior of the careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or overtighten.

windshield. Secure them until they are snug, being

Interior Torx Head Fastener Locations

4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the provided

15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while holding the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten. Repeat for the other arm.

2


5. Replace the protective caps over the wiper arm hex bolts and push gently until they snap into place.

HOOD

Opening The Hood

Release both the hood latches.

Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

6. After completing the steps above:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, reinstall the door frames and raise the top.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, reinstall the

Freedom Panels.

Hood Latch Locations

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood. You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch.

Remove support rod from the hood, and insert into the radi ator crossmember.


Closing The Hood

To close the hood, remove the support rod from the radiator crossmember, and install into the clip on the hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

TAILGATE

Opening

Tailgate Release Handle

To open the tailgate, pull the release handle located on the center of the tailgate and guide it to the lowered position.

The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower, more controlled lowering.

2


Three-Position Tailgate

The vehicle’s tailgate can be set to three positions: open, mid, or closed. The mid position can be used to provide a loading surface for transporting sheet goods.

To use the mid position, open the tailgate and lower it to near mid position.

Secure the tailgate in this position by looping the tailgate straps behind the circular retainer on both sides.

Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer

Tailgate In Mid Position

Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated behind the circular retainer against the sides of the sheet metal.


2

Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap

Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap


• When hauling cargo using the mid position and the tail gate, you

must

support the load at two forward locations:

• At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1)

• Between the wheelhouse and the tailgate (2)

Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box

1 — Support Location 1

2 — Support Location 2

NOTE:

Failure to support the load at these two forward locations could result in damage.

• Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide support at loca tions (1) and (2). Each board will need to be cut to fit inside the pickup box.

• The support at location (1) should be seated in the dedi cated formation on top of the wheelhouses.

• The support at location (2) should use the remaining two

2x4s. Stack the boards and place them into the formation in board will need to be chamfered to fit.

the side wall of the pickup box. The corners of the bottom

NOTE:

• All cargo transported in the pickup box must be secured.

• The maximum payload for the mid position is 500 lbs (226 kg).

Closing

To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides latch into place.

CAUTION!

After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly to ensure it is securely latched. Damage to the vehicle or cargo could occur.


NOTE:

• If the tonneau cover is installed, make sure the tonneau cover is fully closed before closing the tailgate.

• Due to the presence of the Center High-Mounted Stop

Light, removal of the tailgate is not recommended.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) — IF

EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12V battery.

gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink®

The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sun visor or the overhead console, designate the three different HomeLink® center button.

channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the

HomeLink® Buttons

To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will acti vate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.

NOTE:

HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

2


Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make button to.

the device you are trying to program your HomeLink®

To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® indicator flashes.

buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at Home -

Link.com

for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

Programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995 can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” garage door opener.

button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the

NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close manufacturer.

the door. The name and color of the button may vary by

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held trans mitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release to rapid.

both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the

LEARN/TRAIN mode.


NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed Home -

Link® button twice (holding the button for two seconds programming is complete.

each time). If the garage door opener/device activates,

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, re peat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the training.

button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the

2


Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling

Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps."

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers manufactured before

1995.



3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you press and hold the hand-held trans mitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release to rapid.

both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-

Rolling Code)



2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian same manner.

law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the


It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.



3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans mitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has success fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

2


NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/

Gate Operator)



2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/

Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The time.

hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the

Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

NOTE:

The universal garage door opener only operates when the removable tops and doors.

engine is running for security reasons associated with

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-held transmitter.

• Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com

for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan dards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com

for safety information or assistance.

2







2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.









NOTE:



INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Storage

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

Glove Compartment Release Handle

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with the glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision.

Console Storage Compartment

The center console has both an upper and lower storage compartment.

To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch.


To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom latch.

2

Lower Console Storage Latch

Under Seat Storage — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with two options for under seat storage:

• Non-Locking Storage Wall

• Under Seat Locking Storage Bin

Upper Console Storage Latch


Non-Locking Storage Wall Locking Storage Bin

Non-Locking Storage Wall

The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for storage by folding the bottom of the rear seat up and placing items behind the wall.

There is also an option to remove the wall by removing the four bolts that connect the storage wall to the floor.

Under Seat Locking Storage Bin Location

If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located below the rear seats. It can be accessed by folding the rear seat bottom upward into the Stadium Position.

The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on the front of the bin and uses the same key as the Glove Compartment and the Center Console for your vehicle.

Inside the bin are three removable dividers to set up storage that works best for you.

The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by unfastening the four bolts that attach the bin to the vehicle floor. The bottom to access the four bolts.

of the storage bin has rubber mats that need to be removed

NOTE:

All tools for removal of storage bins come equipped with your vehicle in the Jeep Tool Kit.


Your Locking Storage bin also has a front handle that makes it easier to carry and pull out from the floor of the vehicle when the four bolts that attach the bin to the floor are removed.

2

Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)

Under Seat Storage (Open View)

1 — Key Locks

2 — Removable Bolts

3 — Handle


Rear Behind Seat Storage — If Equipped

The rear wall storage bin is located behind the right rear seat.

Rear Wall Storage Bin

NOTE:

The rear seatback can be locked with the mechanical key on your key fob to secure items in the rear wall storage bin. The seat lock is located on the right corner of the seat back. Both seat.

seatbacks should be locked to limit access to items behind

Rear Wall Netting

The rear wall netting can be accessed the same way as the rear wall storage bin.

Rear Wall Storage Bin

1 — Rear Wall Storage Bin

2 — Pull Strap Location

To access the storage bin, pull upward on the pull strap located on the upper outboard side of the right rear seat, and fold the seatback forward.

Rear Wall Netting


Fastener Bin

Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin used to store the fasteners for the doors, windshield, and hard top (if equipped) while not in use. The Fastener Bin is located behind the rear seat storage bin. The Fastener Bin contains foam inserts for each of the fasteners; they are removable.

To remove the Fastener Bin:

1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the Fastener Bin.

2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the Fastener

Bin.

NOTE:

The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener Bin.

Fastener Bin

1 — Door Removal

2 — Under Seat Storage Bin Removal

3 — Hard Top Removal

4 — Folding Windshield

2


Cupholders

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console, near the floor.

Rear Cupholders

NOTE:

Cupholders located in the front center console, as well as the back of the center console are

not

removable.

There are also cupholders located in the rear seat armrest (if equipped). These cupholders can be removed for cleaning.


2

Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders

Electrical Power Outlet

There is a 12V (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.

The front power outlet is located in the center of the instru ment panel below the climate controls, and is powered from switch is in the ON or ACC position.

the ignition switch. Power is available when the ignition

Front Power Outlet

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 A) at

12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use


WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently starting.

to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery with greater caution.

even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accesso ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a suffi cient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.

Power Inverters — If Equipped

There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert Direct Current (DC) current to Alternating Current (AC).

This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.


2

Power Inverter

There may also be a second 115 V (400 W) maximum exterior power inverter located on the rear right side of the truck bed near the tailgate. This inverter can be turned on by the Instru ment Panel Power Inverter switch located to the left of the steering wheel. This inverter can power cellular phones, elec tronics and other low power devices requiring power up to

400 W. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this limit, as will most power tools.

Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)

Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)


NOTE:

400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. If two plugged in.

outlets are in use, 400 W is shared amongst the devices

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.

NOTE:

• The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in the

ACC or ON/RUN position.

• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter will turn off if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped

Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power various electrical devices.

The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be changed via the Uconnect settings. All switches can be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

Auxiliary Switches


NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

For more information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia”.

The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the instru ment panel in the passenger compartment and under the hood to the right, near the battery.

Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel

In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the interior, on the passenger side under the instrument panel.

A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation of your electrical devices.

2

Auxiliary Switch Connections — Under Hood


Wire Color Chart

Circuit Function

Aux Switch 1

Aux Switch 2

Aux Switch 3

Aux Switch 4

Battery

Ignition

Fuse

F93 – 40 Amp

F92 – 40 Amp

F103 – 15 Amp

F108 – 15 Amp

F72 – 10 Amp

F50 – 10 Amp

BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Wire Color

Beige/Pink

Green/Pink

Orange/Pink

Dark Blue/Pink

Red/White

Pink/Orange

CAUTION!

The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs

(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should cleat or cleat rail may occur.

not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to the

Locations

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) &

Underhood (right side near battery)







Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)

Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)

The Bed Rail Tie Down System allows you to properly secure cargo in the truck bed.


2

Bed Rail Tie Down Locations

There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.

Adjustable Cleat Assembly

1 — Utility Rail Detent

2 — Cleat Retainer Nut

3 — Utility Rail Cleat

Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in one of the detents along either utility rail in order to keep cargo prop erly secured.

To move the utility rail cleat to any position on the utility rail, turn the cleat retainer nut counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then, pull out on the utility rail cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and tighten the nut.


To remove the utility rail cleats from the utility rail, slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located at the end of the rail.

TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck bed to keep cargo out of view, and protect from inclement weather.

The Tonneau Cover consists of the following features:

• Easy roll up cover

• Tonneau fore/aft locator

• Crossbar inside bed locator

• Rear latches

• Stowage straps

NOTE:

The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and secured at the front of the truck bed without removing it completely.

Tonneau Cover Installation

To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:

1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and align it to the two fastener locations at the front of the bed.

Fastener Locations

2. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, secure the fasteners to the bed.

3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position before unrolling the Tonneau Cover.

4. Release the stowage straps used to secure the Tonneau

Cover in the rolled up position.


5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the back of the truck bed.

2

Release Stowage Strap Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward


6. Position both Tonneau Cover latches over the locking mechanisms (one on each side of the truck bed), making part of the latch.

sure the plastic retainer is correctly seated in the forward

Correctly Seated Retainer

Incorrectly Seated Retainer

7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is positioned over the locking mechanism, grasp the back of the Tonneau Cover and push downward on the center to engage the locking mechanisms.

NOTE:

Make sure an audible “click” from both sides of the Tonneau engaged.

Cover are heard to confirm that the latch is completely


NOTE:

If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this position and the tailgate can be raised to the mid-position. Refer to “Tail gate” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further infor mation.

2

Push Downward To Lock

Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position

8. The tailgate can now be raised and secured in place.

NOTE:

The Tonneau Cover must be closed completely prior to fully closing the tailgate.


CAUTION!

Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to the cover and/or cargo will occur.

Tonneau Cover Removal

To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:

1. Open the tailgate to access the red Tonneau Cover release straps.

2. Pull one of the red release straps to disengage the rear locking mechanism.

NOTE:

Pulling either strap will release the latches to roll the time.

Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to pull both at the same

3. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting with the rear bar and continue to roll toward the front of the truck bed.

Release Strap Location

Roll Tonneau Cover Forward

4. Using the stowage straps, secure the Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.


2

Secure Tonneau Cover

5. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, remove the two fasteners securing the Tonneau Cover to the front of the truck bed.

Fastener Locations

6. Utilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover up and away from the truck bed.

NOTE:

Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been completely rolled up, and straps are secure, before removing.

7. Store in a safe location.


ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models

ONLY.

The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to allow for carrying an additional cargo load on a Hard Top Vehicle. The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg), this includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.

Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

NOTE:

Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer through

Mopar parts.

External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury carrying cargo on your roof rack.

or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when

CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.

• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.

Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. It is recom mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms sure that the load remains securely attached.

with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be


2

164

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Base Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165

Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.

Premium Instrument Cluster

2. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfacto rily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

3

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn for service.

the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer

3. Instrument Cluster Display

• The instrument cluster display features a driver-inter active display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

5. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles

(kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. The Driver Interactive

Display, located in the instrument panel, indicates how systems are operating and gives you warnings when a system, or systems, needs your attention. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want to make selections and adjustments.


Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center of the instrument cluster.

3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location

7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location

• The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales, Compass

Direction, Outside Temperature, Time, Range, MPG or

Trip are displayed. This also displays the Speedometer which is an option for the upper center reconfigurable but is not the default.

• The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed.

• The lower line where reconfigurable telltales, menu name and menu page are displayed.

3


The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

1 — OK Button

2 — Up Arrow Button

3 — Right Arrow Button

4 — Down Arrow Button

5 — Left Arrow Button

•

Up Arrow Button:

Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items.

•

Down Arrow Button:

Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items.

•

Right Arrow Button:

Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a

Main Menu item.

•

Left Arrow Button:

Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a

Main Menu item.

•

OK Button:

Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

The Main Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Off Road — If Equipped

• Driver Assist — If Equipped

• Fuel Economy

• Trip Info

• Stop/Start — If Equipped

• Audio

• Messages

• Screen Setup

Oil Life Reset — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.


Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the

OK

button.

To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the

ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).

2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the instrument cluster display.

3. Push and hold the

OK

button until the gauge resets to

100%.

Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure


ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds.


OFF/LOCK position.

3


NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the necessary, repeat this procedure.

vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If

Off Road+ Display — If Equipped

When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the switch bank, the

Instrument Cluster Display will begin to show messages related to the feature. Depending on the Four Wheel Drive mode in use, the messages will differ, and after five seconds, all messages will clear from the display. The messages are as follows:

• 2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD

• 4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active

• 4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Speed Control are not available when using Off Road+. If either option is selected, a dedicated message will display indicating that the features are not usable concurrently. Messages are as follows:

• 4H: Speed Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in Off

Road+

• 4H: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) Unavailable in Off Road+

• 4L: Speed Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in 4WD

Low

• 4L: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low

NOTE:

The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while in Off

Road+ varies depending on the 4WD status. If the vehicle is holding the ESC Off button for five seconds will turn off ESC.

In 4L, Electronic Stability Control automatically shuts off regardless of the Off Road Status.

in 4H, Traction Control is automatically turned off. Also,

Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items

The instrument cluster display can be used to view the following main menu items:

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Off-Road - If Equipped

• Fuel Economy

• Trip Info

• Stop/Start

• Audio

• Messages

• Screen Setup

Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items

NOTE:

The instrument cluster display menu items display in the depending on your vehicle features.

center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this section for further information.

Speedometer

Push and release the

up

or

down

arrow button until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the

OK

button to toggle between mph and km/h.

Vehicle Info


up

or

down

arrow button until the

Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the

left

or

right

arrow button to scroll through the information submenus and push and submenus.

release the

OK

button to select or reset the resettable


• Tire Pressure

• Transmission Tempera ture — Automatic

Transmission Only

• Oil Pressure

• Battery Voltage

Off Road

• Coolant Temperature

• Oil Temperature

• Oil Life


up

or

down

arrow button until the Off

Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.

Drivetrain

• Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numerical value of calculated average front wheel angle from the steering wheel orientation.

• Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock” graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.

• Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped): displays front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text message (connected or disconnected).

3


Pitch And Roll

Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic with the angle number on the screen.

NOTE:

When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out. A message indicating the neces sary speed for the feature to become available will also display.

Driver Assist — If Equipped

The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC and

LaneSense systems.


up

or

down


Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped

The instrument cluster display displays the current Adap tive Cruise Control (ACC) system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button

(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering wheel), and the following will display in the instrument cluster display.

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”

Fuel Economy


up

or

down

arrow button until the Fuel

Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.

Toggle

left

or

right

to select a display with or without

Current Fuel Economy Information.

• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 mi (16 km), the

Range display will change to a “LOW” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the


“LOW” message and a new Range value will display.

Range cannot be reset through the OK button.

NOTE:

Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.

• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy

(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the last reset.

• Current – The display shows the current fuel economy

(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while driving.

Trip


up

or

down

arrow button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display, then push and release the

left

or

right

arrow button to select

Trip A or Trip B.

The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the

OK

button to reset all the information.

3


Stop/Start — If Equipped


up

or

down


Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.

Audio


up

or

down


Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.

Phone Call Status

When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the phone is answered or ignored.

NOTE:

The call status will temporarily replace the previous media source information displayed on the screen. When the last used screen.

pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the

Stored Messages


up

or

down


Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the

right

arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display.

Screen Setup

NOTE:

The Screen Setup feature can only be used while the vehicle is not in motion.


up

or

down


Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru ment cluster display. Push and release the

OK

button to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location in which that information is displayed.

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Upper Left

• None

• Compass (default setting)

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range


• Current Fuel Economy

• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

Upper Center

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range




• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• Audio

• Speedometer

• Menu Title (default setting)

Upper Right

• None

• Compass

• Outside Temp (default Setting)

• Time

• Range



• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

Favorite Menus

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Driver Assist — If Equipped (show/hide)

3


• Fuel Economy (show/hide)

• Trip Info (show/hide)

• Stop/Start — If Equipped

• Audio (show/hide)

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Off Road — If Equipped (show/hide)

Gear Display — Premium Cluster Only

• Full (default)

• Single

Current Gear

• Off (default)

• On

Odometer

• Show (default)

• Hide

Defaults

• Cancel

• Restore

Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode Message, And

Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor

(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.

and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power

Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.

the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical

When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery

Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument cluster.

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.

NOTE:

• The charging system is independent from load reduction.

The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.

• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery ment Panel” for further information.

Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instru -

The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction:

• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel

• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors

• HVAC System

• 115 Volt AC Power Inverter System

• Audio and Telematics System

Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are


larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.

• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).

• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.

• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).

• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time

(weeks, months).

• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.

• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.

• The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.

3


What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver

Mode”)

During a trip:

• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:

• Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)

• Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volt,

115V AC, USB ports

• Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)

• Check the audio settings (volume)

After a trip:

• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (addi tional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and ignition off draw currents).

• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).

• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation the cause.

of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indic ative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active tell tales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and not appear.

current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may

Red Warning Lights

— Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/

ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stay on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

— Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a spec ified level.

Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.


NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle checked.

should have service performed, and the brake fluid level

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

3

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning repair to the ABS system is required.

Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/

RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the


light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

— Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the

Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Electro -

Hydraulic Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem.

Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position.

The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition.

If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the tempera ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.


Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emer gency” for further information.

— Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an autho rized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

— Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait

3


— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the

ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

— Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light — If

Equipped

This light indicates when a rear seat belt is unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/

RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear

Seat Belt Reminder Light will change from green to red and a single chime will sound.


— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmis sion fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the trans mission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature

Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Yellow Warning Lights

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in for as long as four seconds.

the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.

conventional brake system will continue to operate

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.


— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability

Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the

“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator

Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when

ESC becomes inactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

3


— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning


This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added.

— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light

(MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.

The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through will drive normally and will not require towing.

several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle possible if this occurs.

should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

Immediate service is required.

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the

4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. It is recommend you drive to the ately.

nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immedi -


— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the

Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga tion” in “Safety” for further information.

— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.

Contact an authorized dealer for service.

— Speed Control Fault Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed

Control System is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

— Sway Bar Fault Warning Light

This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway bar disconnect system.

3


— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning

Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire life and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire possible.

repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached sure telltale.

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres -

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.

Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

recommended that you take your vehicle to an


Yellow Indicator Lights

/ — 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

/ — 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a the wheels.

greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at

/ — 4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part time mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

3


— Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light

This light indicates when front and/or rear axle locker fault has been detected.

— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward

Collision Warning is off.

— Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have been locked. The telltale will display the lock icon on the front and rear axles to indicate the current lock status.

/ — Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the neutral mode.

— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been acti vated.

— Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light —

If Equipped

This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected.

— Off Road+ Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when Off Road+ has been activated.

— Bed Lamp On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the Bed Lamp has been activated.

Green Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target

Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is set and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target


This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in


— 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will provide power to all four wheels and shift the power between the front and rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions.


— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

With A Premium Instrument Cluster

This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in


— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start func tion is in “Autostop” mode.

— Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti vated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

3


NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6

km) with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi cator flashes at a rapid rate.

White Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If

Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting

And Operating” for further information.

— Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light — If

Equipped With a Premium Cluster

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two wheel drive high mode.

— Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This light indicates when a rear seat belt has been buckled in the second row. A telltale will display in the upper right corner of the instrument cluster display to correspond to the specific seating position once the seat belt has been buckled.


— Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This light indicates when a rear seat belt is unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/

RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear

Seat Belt Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.


— Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This light indicates when the rear passenger seats are unoc cupied, and will illuminate in the upper right portion of the configurable corner information.

instrument cluster display, momentarily replacing the


— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped

With A Premium Instrument Cluster

This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting


— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

With Base Instrument Cluster

This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control is set.

Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.


— Selec - Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light

This light will turn on when Selec - Speed Control is acti vated. Selec - Speed Control is available in 4WD Low ONLY.

Refer to Selec - Speed Control (SSC) - If Equipped in “Safety” for further information.

Gray Indicator Lights

3

— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped

With Base Instrument Cluster

This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting


Blue Indicator Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

control systems. When these systems are operating properly,

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal infor mation.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multi media”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states and/or provinces that require an Inspec tion and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

-

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may

not

be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replace ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.


2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi tion, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is

not ready

and you should

not

proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu minated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD

II system is

ready

and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is

not ready,

you should see an autho rized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update.

A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is

now ready

.

3


Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/

M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the

MIL is on with the engine running.

195

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking and enhances vehicle control during braking.

conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock,

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and sound, as well as some related motor noises.

driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop)

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves

• Brake pedal pulsations

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

NOTE:

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equip ment should be performed by qualified professionals.

equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of

(Continued)

4

196 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly stop.

on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

NOTE:

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required.

However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning

Light” does not come on when the ignition is cycled to the

ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake

Control (EBC) system . This system includes Electronic Brake

Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),

Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction

Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway

Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed

Control (SSC), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situa tion by sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by applying the brakes very quickly, creating the most efficient braking assistance possible. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence,

(do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pres sure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

SAFETY 197

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a the user's safety or the safety of others.

reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize

4

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode, and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not func tioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

198 SAFETY

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles, by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to entering ABS before the front axle.

avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM deter mines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road condi tions, leaving the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro priate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate condition.

wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appro priate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appro priate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” also flashes when the Traction Control

System (TCS) is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be conditions.

sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road

SAFETY 199

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

(Continued)

4

200 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the perfor mance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance.

Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effective ness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.

This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alter nate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC

Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illumi nate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC

Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.

NOTE:

For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a momentary button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.

button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial

Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

Full Off — If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the

“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.

running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,

SAFETY 201

NOTE:

System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When system will return to ESC “Full Off”.

the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the

ESC modes may also be affected by off-road modes if so equipped.

WARNING!

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the

ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining off-highway or off-road use only.

stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro planing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,

4

202 SAFETY

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC

OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni tion is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.

If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the “ESC Acti vation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little to the prevailing road conditions.

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when

ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• The park brake must be off.

• The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors are detached then the driver's seatbelt must be buckled.)

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.

The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK

(P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles equipped with a remain active.

manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will

SAFETY 203

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

always required while driving to maintain safe control of

4

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.

204 SAFETY

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK.

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli sion or serious personal injury.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)

Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking perfor mance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no required.

notification to the driver and no driver interaction is

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.

The Electronic Brake Control will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.

Selec - Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped

Selec - Speed Control (SSC) is intended for off-road driving in 4L Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.

SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)

Enabling SSC

SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:

• The driveline is in 4L Range.

• The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).

• The park brake is released.

• The driver door is closed.

• The driver is not applying throttle.

Activating SSC

Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:

• The driver releases the throttle.

• The driver releases the brake.

• The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.

• Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).

The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds: level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of

SAFETY 205

SSC Target Set Speeds

• 1st = 0.6

mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8

mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5

mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1

mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7

mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3

mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6

mph (9 km/h) — if equipped

• REVERSE = 0.6

mph (1 km/h)

• NEUTRAL = 1.2

mph (2 km/h)

• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active

NOTE:

• During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling SSC, the trans mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

4

206 SAFETY

• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode.

This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.

Driver Override

The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.

Deactivating SSC

SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application.

• The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• The vehicle is shifted into PARK.

Disabling SSC

SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the SSC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of the 4L Range.

• The park brake is applied.

• The driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately.

Feedback To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has a lamp which offers feedback to the driver about the state

SSC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating conditions for SSC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.

WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue


weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in

When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced, and you may feel the brakes being applied to indi vidual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying.

TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

SAFETY 207

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake

Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle.

If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and

ESC are in a reduced mode.

4

208 SAFETY

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcy cles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/ side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE (R) and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK (P).

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8

m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches driver of vehicles in these areas.

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the

NOTE:

• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object

(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning

Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).

The area on the taillights, where the radar sensors are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly.

Do not block the taillights where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

SAFETY 209

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of

Operation” in this chapter for further information.

outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime)

4

BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)

Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see during these types of zone entries.

if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert

210 SAFETY

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring

SAFETY 211

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehi cles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Passing

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.

4

Overtaking/Approaching

212 SAFETY

Stationary Objects

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are trav eling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing death.

lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph

SAFETY 213

(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately

20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.

NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked alert the driver.

by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

4

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers

Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.

animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

214 SAFETY

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi media” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the

BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating mode when previously stored mode will be recalled and used.

the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the










SAFETY 215




NOTE:



Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — If

Equipped

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitiga tion provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warn ings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

4

216 SAFETY

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to system determines that a forward collision is probable, the calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the well as a possible brake jerk warning. driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings as

If the driver does not take action based upon these progres sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the ings by braking and the system determines that the driver potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.

If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below

32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.

If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

FCW Message

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the

FCW activation and functionality.

course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an deactivated until the next ignition cycle.

ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deac tivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surround ings.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the warning could lead to serious injury or death.

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this

FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are program mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

SAFETY 217

When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium” setting and the system status is “Warning and Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the autonomous braking vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies

Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.

farther distance than "Medium" setting. This provides the

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction time more dynamic driving experience.

than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a

NOTE:

• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or addi tional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings.

4

218 SAFETY

• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.

• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.

vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming

• FCW disables in the same manner as ACC, and will display a screen indicating that the feature is unavailable when it has been disabled.

FCW Limited Warning

If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited Func tionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv able under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.







Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar -

eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:






NOTE:



Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure.

SAFETY 219

NOTE:

The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is inflated to the placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pres sure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pres sure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold

4

220 SAFETY

placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire

Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Light to turn off.

The system will automatically update and the TPMS

Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven

TPMS to receive this information.

for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold

(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi

(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately

24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the

TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (.193 kPa), but the

TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS

Warning Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall system perfor mance. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho -

(Continued)

System Operation

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

SAFETY 221

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi nation of the TPMS Warning Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure proper pressure.

in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the

4

222 SAFETY

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors

• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages, which display in the instrument cluster

• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire

Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to

XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pres sure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the TPMS Warning

Light will turn off.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS

Warning Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE

SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then which sensor is not being received.

display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate

If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the

“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no

SAFETY 223

longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size

Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value and an

"Inflate to XX" message.

4

224 SAFETY

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addi tion, the instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire

Pressure System” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound, the

TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for3 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and rein stall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati cally. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to

Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare

1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure moni toring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped with a low pressure road tire.

2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on, a chime to sound, an “Inflate to XX” message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the graphic display color.

will still show the low tire pressure value in a different

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning Light as long threshold.

as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning

Tire Fill Alert

This feature notifies the user when the placard tire pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.

The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill

Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect System.

NOTE:

• Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire Fill

Alert system.

• The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an existing

TPM system fault is set to “active” or if the system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).

The system will be activated when there is over 1.5 psi

(10 kPa) of change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in PARK for vehi cles equipped with an Automatic Transmission. For vehicles equipped with a Manual Transmission, the park brake must be applied.

NOTE:

It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire Fill

Alert Mode.

The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in

Tire Fill Alert mode.

When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

SAFETY 225

Operation:

• The horn will chirp to let the user know when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended pressure.

• The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.

• The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let out to reach proper inflation level.

• The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.

Selectable Tire Fill Alert — If Equipped

The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow you to select a pres sure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.

4

226 SAFETY

In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located in the apps menu of the Uconnect System, you will be able to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle tire

15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.

pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from XX to

XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard pressure label.

You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle in the Uconnect System application as preset pressure values.

Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be stored in the

Uconnect System for the front and rear axle. Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.

NOTE:

The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one tire at a time.

The system will be activated when the TPM receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the

ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles with a manual transmis sion. The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.

When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/ deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA states:

1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or deflating the tire.

2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-inflated or over-deflated.

3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is added or removed to reach proper selected pressure level.

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped

The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pres -

sure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.

“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then

Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE

SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

15 mph (24 minutes above km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS

Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE

TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display pres sure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.



Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada

SAFETY 227

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:










4

228 SAFETY

NOTE:



OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section.

It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information) must be secured in the appropriate seating position. (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).

child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).

seat as far back as possible and use the proper child

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu pants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the contact information.

“Customer Assistance” section for customer service

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

SAFETY 229

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.

Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The the START or ON/RUN position.

Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in

4

230 SAFETY

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or

ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is prop erly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating

BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/ shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

(Continued)

SAFETY 231

WARNING!

(Continued)

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.


• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to of a crash.

minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

(Continued)

4

232 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an autho rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.

A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

SAFETY 233

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

234 SAFETY

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on under the seat belt in a collision.

the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to plate.

create a fold that begins immediately above the latch

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze up or down to the position that serves you best.

the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it

Adjustable Upper Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the

SAFETY 235

anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

4

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effec tiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

236 SAFETY

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an

The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat

Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended

Extender when not needed.

seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with preten sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt place ment by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are bag must be replaced immediately.

single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an

Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

SAFETY 237

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints

Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the

4

238 SAFETY

occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the

ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that

WARNING!



(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)


How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode.

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking

SAFETY 239

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switch able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when

Manual.

checked according to the procedures in the Service

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child

Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat

Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim next to each of the rear seats. This clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the seatback when it is being folded and opened. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the occupant.

webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an

Rear Stow Clip

WARNING!

Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the rear seat stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly injured in an accident as a result.

on the occupant and they could be more seriously

4

240 SAFETY

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a colli sion. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with be equipped with the following Air Bag System Compo nents: the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF posi tion or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instru ment panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the bag system immediately.

following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the

ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

SAFETY 241

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays system immediately.

drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag

4

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supple mental Restraint System (SRS), the Redun dant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air

Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” section of this manual.

242 SAFETY

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.

The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags

2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to




Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used for more severe collisions.

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the seat position.

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon

This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.

The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the

SAFETY 243

driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illumi nates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.

NOTE:

When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag

Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.

4

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli -

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

(Continued)

244 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front

Passenger Seat

The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occu pant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of

The Following:


• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat

• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an amber light located on the overhead sports bar


• Passenger Seat Belt

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable

SAFETY 245

designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:

• Sitting upright.

• Facing forward.

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor.

• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat back in an upright position.

4

Seated Properly

246 SAFETY

The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects in it.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, including a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child or small adult.

• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger

Seat Occupant

Status

Front Passenger

Advanced Air

Bag Disabled

Indicator Light

(“PAD”) Status

Front Passenger

Air Bag Status

Unoccupied seat*

Unbuckled

Unoccupied seat*Buckled

NOT

ILLUMINATED

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

DEACTIVATED

DEACTIVATED

Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light objects

Rear-facing child restraint**

Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat**

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

DEACTIVATED

DEACTIVATED

DEACTIVATED

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger

Seat Occupant

Status

Front Passenger

Advanced Air

Bag Disabled

Indicator Light

(“PAD”) Status

Front Passenger

Air Bag Status

Small adult

Properly seated adult

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

NOT

ILLUMINATED

DEACTIVATED

ACTIVATED

* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD

System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.

** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child passenger seat.

restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front

SAFETY 247

WARNING!




Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indi cator Light

The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)

Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD

Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the

PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.

4

248 SAFETY

The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the

PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated tivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.

properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deac -

The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated for most properly seated and restrained children in the systems. However, under certain conditions, even with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD Indicator passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint

Light may not be illuminated, even though the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.

NEVER

assume the

PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the

NOTE:

If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indi cator Light will illuminate.

If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult

Passenger:

If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the OCS

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag: to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to activate the

1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step out of the vehicle.

2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat, such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra clothing, etc.

3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.

4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat, with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the floor, and with their back against the seatback.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in this seated position for two to three minutes after restarting the vehicle.

WARNING!

• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may cause illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator Light is deploy in the event of a collision.

OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not




• Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)

When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front

SAFETY 249

Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult

(depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.

The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Indi cator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.

PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front

If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.

Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s

Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly posi tioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.

The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in deactivation or

4

250 SAFETY

activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the

Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include: front passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger

• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.

• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright position.

• The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated

(e.g., backpack, box, etc.).

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.

• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.

• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop erly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 251

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

WARNING!

• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

(Continued)

4

Not Seated Properly

252 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.

• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the

OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.

A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have ately.

an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi -

• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a colli sion. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.

• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD

Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illu minate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take ately.

the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immedi -

The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo nents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA

US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

The following requirements must be strictly followed:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cush ions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after market seat cover or cushion.

• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be approved by FCA US LLC.

modified or replaced with any part except those which are

SAFETY 253

WARNING!

• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).

• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

4

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.

(Continued)

254 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted

Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc tion potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be you, causing serious injury.

adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side

Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air

Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a deployed.

good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

SAFETY 255

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side

Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air

Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

4

256 SAFETY

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air

Bags.

collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with



• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.

This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/ or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme diately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like parti cles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.

These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.

If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

SAFETY 257

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to following functions: have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the

• Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)

• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power

4

258 SAFETY

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident

Response System:

• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower

Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door

• Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine

• Electric Motor (if equipped)

• Electric power steering

• Brake booster

• Electric park brake

• Automatic transmission gear selector

• Horn

• Front wiper

• Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP

(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instru ment panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

SAFETY 259

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

4

260 SAFETY

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United

States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings

Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.

in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards.

You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

SAFETY 261

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to http:// www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:

1–888–327–4236

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safed rivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

-

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Recommended Type Of Child

Restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle

4

262 SAFETY

Larger Children

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child

Restraint

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.




WARNING!

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-posi tioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly.

If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and seat belt.

belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the

SAFETY 263

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child installing an infant or child restraint.

restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the tion. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat posi -

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the

4

264 SAFETY

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit peri odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi tion. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

SAFETY 265

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of the Child +

Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower

Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower

Anchors + Top

Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

X

X X

X

4

266 SAFETY

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) /

ISOFIX Restraint System

have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the the following table for more information.

top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This

Vehicle

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.

There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY 267

the child restraint?

rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight

+ weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH seating positions?

lower anchorages from the outboard

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

No

Yes

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use combined weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg).

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

LATCH anchorages if allowed by the

You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.

19.2

inches (488 mm) apart. Do not

4

268 SAFETY

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

No

Yes

Yes

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated

LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the position.

The child seat may touch the back of the

LATCH anchorages in an outboard your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See

The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.

Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seat back and seat cushion.

SAFETY 269

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.

4

LATCH Anchorages

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.

Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top attached to the anchorage.

tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is

270 SAFETY

Center Seat LATCH

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing

LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s positions.

seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard

Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible

Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing type of seat belt each seating position has.

Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the allow more room for the child seat.

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child tions to attach a tether anchor.

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc -

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in instructions.

the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4

mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat

Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and acci dentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installa tion, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then

SAFETY 271

buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child installing an infant or child restraint.

restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

4

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

272 SAFETY

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in

“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under

“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on

ALR.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY 273

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight

+ weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the restraint.

recommended weight limit of the child

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint.

See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To information.

Know Your Vehicle” for further

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

No

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

4

274 SAFETY

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.

For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rear ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the

Automatic Locking mode.

into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the seat.

child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the

Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4

mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers

SAFETY 275

The Top Tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.

2. Release the seat back by pulling the release strap located on the top of the seat back to provide room to reach the tether anchor.

3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts under neath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint (if adjustable) to the upward position to pass the its posts.

tether strap underneath the head restraint and between

4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on the cab back wall (inside the opening labeled with the tether anchorage symbol.)

5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch engages and no red indicator is showing on the strap

4

276 SAFETY

6. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manu facturer's instructions.

Tether Anchorage Locations

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child.

Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!


• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in killed.

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or


(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)


Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

SAFETY 277

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

4

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

278 SAFETY

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the for service if your defroster is inoperable.

air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT

FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.

NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal

(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving.

Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the posi tion of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

(Continued)

SAFETY 279

WARNING!

(Continued)

• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

4

280 SAFETY

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn panel.

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

281

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.




• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.


Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in

NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking

Four-Wheel Drive Models Only

In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The “4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK position

(vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

5

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

Normal Starting

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP

Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage auto matically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP

Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the transmission will automatically select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a

4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE START/

STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode.

5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the

ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine

OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmis sion is not in PARK.

off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the

NOTE:

The system will automatically time out and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s

Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Posi tion)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To use the accessories, follow these steps: change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode.

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display

“ACC”).

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster will display “OFF”).

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

AutoPark

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied vehicle into PARK.

upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the

The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.

WARNING!

• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid

(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added exiting the vehicle.

precaution, always apply the parking brake when

• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the into PARK.

primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle

5


If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission

• Driver door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)

• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Vehicle Speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)

• Ignition switched from RUN to OFF

NOTE:

For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off and the ignition will change to ACC mode. After 30 the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition OFF.

minutes

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Auto -

Park.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission

• Driver door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is removed an additional trigger would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing)


• Driver door is removed

• Vehicle speed is 1.2

mph (2.0

km/h) or less

• Driver seat belt is unbuckled

• Driver door is ajar

• Brake Pedal is not depressed

The MESSAGE “

AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to

Gear

” will display in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:

In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the returned to “P” to select desired gear.

instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector must be

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage

ONLY

when vehicle speed is 1.2

mph

(2.0

km/h) or less.

The MESSAGE “

Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P

” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2

mph (2.0

km/h).

WARNING!

If vehicle speed is above 1.2

mph (2.0

km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2

mph (2.0

km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

4WD LOW

AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in

4WD LOW.

The MESSAGE “

AutoPark Disabled

” will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:


• Driver door is ajar


The MESSAGE “

AutoPark Not Engaged

” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue closed.

until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver door is

ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK

that your vehicle is in

PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

and on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal

Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and

This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

Leave the ignition in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds.

5


WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the personal injury.

vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting information.

Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait

60 seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a stan dard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or

90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” in this manual.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.


NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be as a problem.

considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted

PARKING BRAKE

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans mission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or

FIRST gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console behind the gear selector. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever completely.

5


Parking Brake Lever

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch

ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound attempting to move the vehicle.

to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake vehicle.

should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard damage.

against vehicle movement and possible injury or

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

injured. Children should be warned not to touch the

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury.

Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in

PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST cause damage or injury.

gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is authorized dealer immediately.

indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an


MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied incline.

when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an

CAUTION!

• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch wear on the clutch.

pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal

• Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal components.

NOTE:

During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in normal.

shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is

5


Manual Transmission Shifter

To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the selector).

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward.

Shift Pattern

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.

You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position.

NOTE:

A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal.

This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm.

This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.


Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended upshift speeds may not apply.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

3.6L

Accel.

Cruise

15 (24)

10 (16)

24 (39)

19 (31)

50 (80)

40 (64)

65 (104)

55 (88)

70 (112)

65 (105)

NOTE:

Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

Downshifting

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.

In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

NOTE:

Above certain speeds downshifts may be blocked and not available.

CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.

(Continued)

5


CAUTION!

(Continued)

• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.

• Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause engine damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage.

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed pressed.

and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is

Gear Selection

Maximum Speed

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

6 to 5

80 (129)

5 to 4

70 (113)

4 to 3

50 (81)

3 to 2

30 (48)

2 to 1

15 (24)

NOTE:

Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or

DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully ment and possible injury or damage.

when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move -

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely before exiting the vehicle.

stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is

(Continued)

5


WARNING!

(Continued)

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.


• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock system which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the igni tion can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmis sion in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off).

Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is

OFF

(not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE

Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the

REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects

PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink tion, or the requested shift can be completed.

continuously until the selector is returned to the proper posi -

The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be between these gears.

sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting

The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift posi tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward

(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the

DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear,


and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.

Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information.

Gear Selector

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is prob ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi tion). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

5


Gear Ranges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the important when the engine is cold.

selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmis sion into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake,

• Shift the transmission into PARK,

• Turn the ignition OFF and,

• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.

NOTE:

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully ment and possible injury or damage.

when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move -

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely before exiting the vehicle.

stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.


• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

5

CAUTION!

• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of

PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.

(Continued)


CAUTION!

(Continued)

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion:

• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK position

(when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE

[D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake vehicle.

and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road have a collision.

conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and

CAUTION!

• Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Oper ating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case

Of Emergency” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position operating conditions.

provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle


speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

MANUAL (M)

The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoS tick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage

Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious

5


In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (prefer ably, at an authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip ment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the

MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instru ment cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector in the MANUAL (M) position to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in

the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) will command an upshift.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down shift is chosen, except as described below.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or third gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.


• Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Auto -

Stick is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.

NOTE:

When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the

DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick posi tion at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

5

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.


FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

WARNING!

Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the

Four-Position Transfer Case

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)

• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)

• N (Neutral)

• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2H

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4H

Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides addi tional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector

NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

4L

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and


maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.

In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L posi tions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting

Procedures” in this section for further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.

The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are case is shifted into the 4H position.

locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.

5


Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.

Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

Shifting Procedures

2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be

0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the tarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift.

Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen -

NOTE:

• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while damage to the transfer case.

only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause

• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.

During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal.

4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

NOTE:

Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the

vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

WARNING!

Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the

Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped

The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between tions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction.

the two rear wheels, the differential automatically propor -

Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving condi tions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.


WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground.

The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models

The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel

(to the right of the steering column).

5

Axle Lock Switch Panel


This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:

• Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.

• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

• Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same speed.

To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illumi nate), push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle

(the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle unlock the front axle.

is locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or

NOTE:

The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked.

To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.

Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L

(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF posi tion.

The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle speed is less than

10 mph (16 km/h).

Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.

This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering column).

Sway Bar Switch

Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar Indi cator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illumi nate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator

Light” will flash during activation transition, or when activa tion conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions.

WARNING!

Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above

18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mode.

mph (22 a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once km/h), the system will once again attempt to return to off-road

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or

4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected. Refer to information.

“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further


NOTE:

The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.

To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch again.

5

WARNING!

If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced.

Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).

Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected control, which could result in serious injury.

stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle


Off Road+ — If Equipped

Off Road+ Switch

When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve the user experience when using specific Off Road driving modes. To activate Off Road+, push the Off Road+ switch in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve depending of which Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is activated.

NOTE:

Off Road+ will not function in Two Wheel Drive High (2H) mode. If the button is pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster display will show the message “Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.

When Off Road+ is active, the following features will acti vate:

• The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the Instrument

Cluster Display

• A mode specific message will display the Instrument

Cluster Display

• Off Road pages will launch on the radio head-unit (if equipped)

• The Off Road Camera will launch (if equipped)

Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave in different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The following enhancements will occur when using Off Road+.

4L

• Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and controllability focus, change in shifting schedule when range, operates at lower vehicle speeds rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-gain and low

• Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential tuning at slower speed or 1st gear

• Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition cycles

4H

• Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand perfor mance/ wheel slip focus, change in shift schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds

• Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake lock differential with no engine management

• Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited speed

• Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition cycles

Speed Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster message will display indicating this if either feature is acti vated while in Off Road+.

If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the following will occur on the vehicle:

• Push of the ESC Button: Traction Control will turn off, but

Stability Control will remain active.

• Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction

Control and Stability Control will turn off.


ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the system will provide mechanical steering capability.

CAUTION!

Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

5


If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to “Instru ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru ment Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these condi tions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.

Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine.

Electronic Stop/Start (ESS) vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the Stop/Start System be disabled during off-road use.

Secondary Battery

Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 volt vehicle elec trical system. The secondary battery is located behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.

1 — Primary Battery

2 — Secondary Battery

Battery Locations

Automatic Mode

WARNING!

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener gize the 12 volt electrical system.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Serious injury or death could result if you do not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly disconnect, see your authorized dealer.

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other condi tions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP

ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must

Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed.

5


The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indi cating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be main tained upon return to an engine running condition.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start

Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled

• Driver’s door is not closed

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold

• Battery charge is low

• The vehicle is on a steep grade

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed

• HVAC set to MAX A/C

• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature

• Engine temperature too high

• The transmission is not in a forward gear

• Hood is open

• 4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral

• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

• Accelerator pedal input

• Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from previous auto-stop

• Steering angle beyond threshold

• ACC is on and speed is set

• Vehicle is at high altitude

• System fault present

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START

READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The trans mission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automat ically While In Autostop Mode:

• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE

• To maintain cabin temperature comfort

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode

• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted

• Battery voltage drops too low

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applica tions)

• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed

• A Stop/Start system error occurs

• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes

• 4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode

• Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold


To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System

1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STOP/START Off Switch

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru ment cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START system), the engine will not be stopped.

4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condi tion every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

5


To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System

Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START

SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in “Getting to

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(IF EQUIPPED)

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consump tion. The system will stop the engine automatically during a clutch pedal will automatically restart the vehicle.

vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Pressing the

Electronic Stop/Start (ESS) vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.

NOTE:


Secondary Battery

Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 volt vehicle elec trical system. The secondary battery is located behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.

1 — Primary Battery

2 — Secondary Battery

Battery Locations

Automatic Mode

WARNING!



The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/

START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO

STOP ACTIVE mode.

system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other

To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE

Mode, The Following Must Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”


in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).

• The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and the clutch pedal must be fully released.

The engine will shut down,

the tachometer will fall to the

Stop/Start position,

the STOP/START AUTO STOP tioning (HVAC) air flow will be reduced.

ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air condi -

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In following situations the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled

• Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C)

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC


• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature

• Battery discharged

5


• When driving in REVERSE

• Hood is open

• 4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral

• Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is open

• Vehicle is at high altitude

• The vehicle is on a steep grade

• Forward Gear is engaged

• Steering angle beyond threshold

• System fault is present

• HVAC set to MAX A/C

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START

READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require complete/ full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START

SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode, the engine will start automatically when:

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.


• STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE time exceeds

5 minutes

• Battery voltage drops too low

• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal applica tions

• Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)

• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed

• 4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode

• Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STOP/START Off Switch

2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” information.

in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/Start system), the engine will not be stopped.


4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off, the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch.

5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System

Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START

SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in “Getting to

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

5


SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

1 — SET (+)/Accel

2 — On/Off

3 — RES/Resume

4 — SET (-)/Decel

5 — CANC/Cancel

Speed Control Buttons

NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control

System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed

Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by desired vehicle set speed.

pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy slippery.

traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or

To Activate

Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose off when you are not using it.

control and have an accident. Always leave the system

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the

SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET

(+)

button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster


Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(+)

button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET

(+)

button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET

(-)

button.

5


The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(-)

button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.


• Pushing the SET

(-)

button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy slippery.

traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph

(32 km/h).

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from memory.


ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — Distance Setting Increase

2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off

3 — Distance Setting Decrease

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving conve nience provided by cruise control while traveling on high ways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

Speed Control func tion performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.

5


ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a ahead of you.

forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appro priate distance between vehicles.

• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

NOTE:

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involve ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten tive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor tantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten tion is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn ings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

• The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

• On vehicles with automatic transmission, will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start brakes and that the brakes must be applied manu ally. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.

• You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC system.

NOTE:

Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the

Control and Forward Collision Warning System.

vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above

0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”

When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

5


NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low

• When you apply the brakes

• When the parking brake is applied

• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or

NEUTRAL

• When the manual transmission is in first gear

• When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)

(manual transmission)

• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range

• When the brakes are overheated

• When the driver’s door is open at low speeds

• When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds

• ESC Full-Off Mode is active

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays

“ACC Ready.”


To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system

Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” will turn off and the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive


WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You system off when you are not using it.

could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the


To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET

(+)

button or the SET

(-)

button and release. The instrument cluster display will display the set speed.

If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph

(32

(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is speed of the vehicle. On vehicles equipped with a manual above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current transmission, the system cannot be set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in first gear.

NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed.

If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster display.

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will

5


only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied

• The CANC button is pushed

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs

• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System

(ESC/TCS) activates

• The vehicle parking brake is applied

• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds

• Driver door is opened at low speeds

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over heated)

• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs

• The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h) (manual transmission only)

• The clutch is depressed for more than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)

• The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than ten seconds (manual transmission only)

• The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual transmission only)

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is pushed

• The ignition is turned OFF

• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too personal injury.

warnings can result in a collision and death or serious



While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET

(+)

button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):


U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(+)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button instrument cluster display.

is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the


• Pushing the SET

(+)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the the instrument cluster display.

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in

5



While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET

(-)

button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(-)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button instrument cluster display.

is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the


• Pushing the SET

(-)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.

• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will auto matically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.

When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range

(overheated).


Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).

Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calcu lates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

5

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)


Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —

Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —

Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same

Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor

• The distance setting is changed

• The system disengages (Refer to the information on ACC

Activation)

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if neces sary.

NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

Brake Alert

NOTE:

The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.

warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the

ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This addi tional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the


left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic Transmission

Only)

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with

Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.

While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver inter vention will be required at this moment.

5


WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these personal injury.

warnings can result in a collision and death or serious

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in displays depends on ACC system status.

the center of the instrument cluster. The information it

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button

(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following appears in the instrument cluster display:


When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off.”


When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Set

When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”

When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument cluster display.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display system will deactivate.

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to “Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.


If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an behind the lower grille.

obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.

Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc tion.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise

Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reac tivating it.

5


NOTE:

• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.

Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.

“Clean Front Windshield” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display “ACC/

FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require

When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruc tion, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.

“Service ACC/FCW” Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW

Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,

ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try acti vating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.

In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.

NOTE:

• Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/radar field of view.

• Cracks in the windshield may affect the performance of

ACC, depending on the size and location of the crack.

Towing A Trailer

Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.


Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accel erate unexpectedly.

vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the

5

Offset Driving Condition Example


Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic condi tions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

ACC Hill Example

Turn Or Bend Example

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. There may not be sufficient distance to apply the brakes if necessary.

the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to


Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have distance to the vehicle ahead.

moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient

5

Narrow Vehicle Example

Lane Changing Example


Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehi cles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle to apply the brakes if necessary.

ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example















NOTE:



Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise

20 mph (32 km/h).

Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above

To change between the different control modes, push the

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.


Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

5

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.

Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message

“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.




When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET

(+)

button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or

Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(+)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button instrument cluster display.

is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the


• Pushing the SET

(+)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the the instrument cluster display.

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in


When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET

(-)

button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or

Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET

(-)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button instrument cluster display.

is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the


• Pushing the SET

(-)


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the the instrument cluster display.

button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANC button is pushed.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System

(ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over heated).

• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.

• The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual transmission only).


• The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h) (manual transmission only).

• The clutch is depressed for more than ten seconds (manual transmission only).

• The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than ten seconds (manual transmission only).

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph

(32 km/h).

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is pushed

• The ignition is cycled OFF

• Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed

5


PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage recommendations.

Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in

REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector posi tion, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.

When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor mation.

detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster display will show the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.


If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

5

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc


Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(inches/cm)

Arcs — Left

Arcs —

Center

Greater than

79 inches

(200 cm)

None

None

79-59 inches

(200-150 cm)

None

6th Solid

59-47 inches

(150-120 cm)

None

5th Solid

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

None

4th Solid

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

None

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

2nd Flashing

3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing

Less than

12 inches

(30 cm)

1st Flashing

1st Flashing


Arcs — Right

Audible Alert

Chime

None

None

None

Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear center only)

WARNING ALERTS

None

Slow


None

Slow


None

Fast


2nd Flashing

Radio

Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Fast

Yes

1st Flashing

Continuous

Yes

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the climate controls.

5

ParkSense Switch


When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE

OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE

OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4L).

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARK -

SENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction appear, see an authorized dealer.

and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the could damage the sensors.

sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating prop erly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Park -

Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system

OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.

are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/


bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinter preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

5


CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the proximity.

sensors will not be detected when they are in close

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park -

Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Front & Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” dations.

in this section for limitations of this system and recommen -

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in

REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active again if the

6 mph (9 km/h).

vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors/ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.


ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instru ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru ment Panel” for further information.

ParkSense Display

The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

Park Assist Ready

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center front region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

5


If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show

Single 1/2 Second Tone

Slow Tone

Fast Tone


The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance

(inches/cm)

Arcs — Left

Arcs —

Center

Arcs — Right

Continuous Tone

Greater than

79 inches

(200 cm)

None

None

79-59 inches

(200-150 cm)

None

6th Solid

WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

59-47 inches

(150-120 cm)

None

5th Solid

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

None

4th Solid

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

None

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

2nd Flashing

Less than

12 inches

(30 cm)

1st Flashing

3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

5


Audible Alert

Chime

None

Single 1/2-

Second Tone


WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Slow


Slow


Fast


Radio

Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Front Distance

(inches / cm)

Arcs — Left

Arcs — Center

Arcs — Right

Audible Alert

Chime

Radio Volume

Reduced

47

Greater than inches (120 cm)

None

None

None

None

No

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

None

4th Solid

None

None

No

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

None

3rd Flashing

None

None

No

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

Fast

Yes

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Fast

Yes

Continuous

Yes

Yes

Less than 12 inches

(30 cm)

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

Continuous

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert

(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle pedal is applied.

has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the brake

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program mable.

The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect

System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.

The factory default volume setting is medium.

ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front

ParkSense switch.

Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear

ParkSense switch.


When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster display vehicle is in REVERSE.

will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the

The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when

Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The

Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the

Sense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the

Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear Park -

Service The ParkSense Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

SENSORS”, “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT

5


SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE

REQUIRED” message. When the gear selector is moved to

REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”or “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, Park -

Sense will not operate. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT

SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an autho rized dealer.

If the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE

REQUIRED” message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the could damage the sensors.

sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle graphic of the Front or

Rear ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Furthermore, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle graphic with “OFF” in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Park -

Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinter preting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the message to appear in the instrument cluster display.

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

• ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could vehicle.

provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the


WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

5


CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the proximity.

sensors will not be detected when they are in close

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park -

Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The license plate.

ParkView camera is located on the tailgate, above the vehicle

Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera

1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display, and then press “Backup Camera”.

2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear View

Camera system on.

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch

Display, there is only one option for manual activation of the

Uconnect system, and then press “Backup Camera”.

Rear View Camera. Press the “More” hard button on the

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph tion is cycled to the OFF position, or the touchscreen button

“X” to disable display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.

(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, the igni -

Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to

8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated.

The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the

Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the trans mission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.

• The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.


Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone

Red

Yellow

Green

Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle

0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

1 ft - 6.5

ft (30 cm - 2 m)

6.5

ft or greater (2 m or greater)

Trailer Hitch Zoom

If equipped, the Trailer Hitch Zoom feature aids the driver in lining up a trailer to the vehicle’s trailer hitch by allowing the driver to toggle back and forth between the normal view and a 4X zoom mode. The image is displayed on the radio screen manually in certain situations through the controls screen.

when the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, as well as

5


WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to result in serious injury or death.

pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.

when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a

TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows you to you see an on-screen image of the front view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check Entire Surround ings” across the top of the screen.

Front View Camera

NOTE:

The system will stay active while in 4L (Four-Wheel Drive

Low Range).

The TrailCam System has programmable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa tion.

Manual Activation Of The TrailCam

TrailCam View can be activated via the below methods:

1. Press the “FWD Camera” button on the controls screen.

2. Press the “FWD Camera” button on the app menu.

3. Press the “FWD Camera” button on the Off Road Pages.

4. Auto Launch Off Road+ Setting is selected under camera settings and press the “Off Road+” button.

The TrailCam View can also be activated via “FWD Camera” button on the Backup Camera View. The Backup Camera on the TrailCam View.

View can also be activated via the “Backup Camera” button

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera

Delay turned off) and TrailCam View is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera

Delay turned on) and the TrailCam View is active, the

TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission


is shifted into PARK, the ignition is cycled to the OFF posi tion, or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of the

TrailCam View is pressed.

Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the

Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.

image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed

NOTE:

• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4H, the TrailCam image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button is cycled to the OFF position.

“X”, the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition

• The touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in reverse.

• The TrailCam View will stay active regardless of the vehicle speed and time while in 4L (Four-Wheel Drive

Low Range).

5


Cleaning The TrailCam

Press the “Clean Camera” soft button located on the

TrailCam View to wash the TrailCam.

• The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a time.

• The “Clean Camera” system is not available when wind shield washing is in process.

When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam View based on the steering wheel position.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Fuel Filler Cap

The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

To access the fuel filler cap, push on the fuel filler door to unlatch it. To close the fuel filler door, push on it a second replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

time. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the

Fuel Filler Door

Fuel Filler Cap

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and turn on.

may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.


NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tight ened.

• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard.

This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.

Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on

5


VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and bottom of the label is your VIN.

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR on

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are before any occupants or cargo are added.

determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle


may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified

GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limita tions are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.

Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

5


To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.

Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in


WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control — If Equipped

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

most popular on the market today and they are commonly

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides


for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/ loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking perfor mance, and could result in a collision.

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

5


Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Class

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - Medium Duty

Class III - Heavy Duty

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight

(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain in this section.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

Model

GCWR (Gross

Combined Wt. Rating)

Frontal Area

Sport - Manual

Transmission

Sport - Automatic

Transmission

9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)

9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)

Max. GTW (Gross

Trailer Wt.)

4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)

Max. Trailer Tongue

Wt. (See Note)

400 lbs (181 kg)

450 lbs (204 kg)

Model

Sport - Automatic

Transmission (Tow

Package)

Sport - Automatic

Transmission (Max

Tow Package)

Sport S - Manual

Transmission

Sport S - Automatic

Transmission

Sport S - Automatic

Transmission (Tow

Package)

Sport S - Automatic

Transmission (Max

Tow Package)

Overland - Manual

Transmission

Overland - Automatic

Transmission

GCWR (Gross


11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)

12,800 lbs (5,806 kg)

9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)

9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)

11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)

12,800 lbs (5,806 kg)

9,100 lbs (4,128 kg)

9,650 lbs (4,377 kg)

Frontal Area

55 ft

2

(5.11

m

2

)

55 ft

2

(5.11

m

2

)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)

55 ft

2

(5.11

m

2

)

55 ft

2

(5.11

m

2

)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)

40 ft

2

(3.72

m

2

)


Max. GTW (Gross

Trailer Wt.)


Wt. (See Note)

6,000 lbs (2,722kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)

7,650 lbs (3,470 kg)

4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)

6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)

7,650 lbs (3,470 kg)

4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)

765 lbs (347 kg)

400 lbs (181 kg)

450 lbs (204 kg)

600 lbs (272 kg)

765 lbs (347 kg)

400 lbs (181 kg)

450 lbs (204 kg)

5


Model

Overland - Automatic

Transmission (Tow

Package)

Rubicon - Manual

Transmission

Rubicon - Automatic

Transmission

GCWR (Gross


11,100 lbs (5,035 kg)

10,000 lbs (4,536 kg)

12,450 lbs (5,647 kg)

Frontal Area

40

40

55 ft ft ft

NOTE:

• When using a bumper mounted ball on any model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg), 30 ft

2

(2.79

m

2

) frontal area, and 350 lbs (159 kg) tongue weight.

2

(3.72

m

2

(3.72

m

2

(5.11

m

2

)

2

)

2

)

Max. GTW (Gross

Trailer Wt.)

6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)

7,000 lbs (3,175 kg)


Wt. (See Note)

600 lbs (272 kg)

450 lbs (204 kg)

700 lbs (317 kg)

• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to nance” for further information.

“Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Mainte -

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle

• The weight of the driver and all passengers


NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And options or dealer-installed options must be considered as weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – proper tire inflation procedures.

General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in dure.

“Servicing And Maintenance” for proper inspection proce -

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's

GVWR and GAWR limits.

5


Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do

not

interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actu ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a controller is not required.

hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake

NOTE:

This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller connector under the dash to the left of the brake pedal. This will be a four pin connector and will be gray in color.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake when you need them and could have an accident.

system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to and longer stopping distances.

accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.


The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

NOTE:

• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.

• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

Seven-Pin Connector

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

5


If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.


Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while ally select a lower gear.

in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to manu -

NOTE:

Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.

AutoStick — If Equipped

• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.

frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.


RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground

See Instructions

Four-Wheel Drive Models

Flat Tow NONE

• Automatic transmission in PARK.

• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).

• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).

Front

Rear

• Tow in forward direction.

NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE:

When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE:

The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N), auto matic transmission must be in PARK, and manual transmis sion must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.

Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).

(Continued)

5


CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.

• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing.

• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in

Neutral) for recreational towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be

Otherwise, internal damage will result.

certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

4. Turn the engine OFF.

5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).

6. Start the engine.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmis sion in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.


11. Firmly apply the parking brake.

12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual trans mission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).


CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the

OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.

transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is

13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.

14. Release the parking brake.

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.




5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

5



7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

NOTE:

When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.

8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.

9. Release the brake pedal.

10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.



13. Release the parking brake.

14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal

(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.

DRIVING TIPS

On-Road Driving Tips

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design charac teristics give them a higher center of gravity than conven tional passenger cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conven tional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehi cles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

Off-Road Driving Tips

Side Step Removal — If Equipped

NOTE:

Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed to prevent damage.

1. There are two nuts connecting to the body side and one bolt connecting to the underbody on each attachment bracket. There are four attachment brackets on each side step.


2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the underside of the vehicle for each of the four brackets. Repeat for other side of vehicle.

5

Fastener Locations (One Side)

Underside Nuts

3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed, pull the side step assembly off of the vehicle.

4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to the body side holes and fasten all nuts on all four brackets. Then secure procedure for the other side.

all four bolts to the underbody. Repeat the reassembly


Bumper End Cap Removal — If Equipped

The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be removed by following the steps below:

NOTE:

Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumper only.

1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket (Bolts

#1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.

Bolt #2

2. Remove the remaining eight bolts. The end cap can now be expanded open.

3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store it where it will not get damaged.

4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.

Bolt #1

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.

You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over.

on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface

NOTE:


WARNING!

Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.

Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road situation.


CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.

When To Use 4L (Low) Range

When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.

5

CAUTION!

Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.


Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

Snow

In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.

Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.

Mud

Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are

As a good practice before entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.

normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck.

Sand

Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pres sure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and main taining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a cally improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drasti -

pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces.

Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)

While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.


WARNING!

Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

Using A Spotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obsta cles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.

Crossing Large Rocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to cross the large rocks with your tires.

take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to

5


CAUTION!

• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.

• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills.

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!

There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

Crossing Logs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately

10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high-centered.

Getting High-Centered

If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when or winching the vehicle off the object.

you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle

CAUTION!

Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage.

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb dent with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

and should not be attempted. You should always feel confi -

Before Climbing A Steep Hill

As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.

Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.

and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower


Driving Up Hill

Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.

5

WARNING!

Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.


Driving Downhill

Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?

Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending seriously injured or killed.

a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be

Driving Across An Incline

If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is neces sary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.

Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes.

Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or down.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.

Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.

You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE

(automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L

(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3 to 5 mph{5 to 8 km/h} maximum) and light throttle.

Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.


CAUTION!

• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle wet and/or muddy.

components, and your brakes will be less effective once

• When driving through water, do not exceed 5

(8 mph km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Before You Cross Any Type Of Water

As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition.

Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for hidden obsta cles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when deter mining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the

5


Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing

Water

Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it diffi cult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you using the low and slow method.

are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed

CAUTION!

Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other

Flowing Water

Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water.

Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle down stream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an technique.

angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow

WARNING!

Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.

This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any ready when you need it.

problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, driveline, and exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension.

Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values spec ified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.


NOTE:

Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in necessary.

dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as

5

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance

388

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located on the instru ment panel below the climate controls.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle ists.

is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motor -

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

1 — Assist Button

2 — SOS Button

Assist And SOS Buttons

If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and an

SOS button.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is related to the use of the features and applications in this involving serious injury or death.

safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are network.

connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389

someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.

• SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.

SOS Call

1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.

NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a

10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the

SOS call button on the overhead console or press the cancel lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS

Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead console.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.

6

390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS oper ator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the ator: following important vehicle information to a SOS oper -

• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi tional help is needed.

WARNING!




NOTE:


• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to deter mine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with the vehicle occupants, and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to operator terminates the connection.

remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS

5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or loca tion), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency immediately and move to a safe location.

Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent oper able network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.

An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR

VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY

REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN

ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS

OPERATE.

AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You help protect you.

could be injured if the air bag system is not there to

SOS Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Mexico

DO NOT

have SOS Call system capabilities.

SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

6


WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the

Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the rized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.

Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your autho -

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS

Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active

• The ignition is in the OFF position

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact

• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash

• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global

Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed

• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility

• Operator error by the SOS operator

• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion

• Weather

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels

WARNING!




NOTE:


• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent

LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,

which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer gency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the

SOS Call system to function properly.








NOTE:


party responsible for compliance could void the user's


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.







2. This device must accept any interference received, includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation.


Science and Economic Development applicables aux appar -

6


eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:



BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

Soundbar Dome Lamp

** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Name

Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp

Heater Control Lamps (2)

Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger

658

194

**

912




NOTE:



Bulb Number


Bulb Name

Headlamps (2)

Premium Head Lamps

Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)

Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)

Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp

Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp

Front Side Marker Lamps (2)

Base Fog Lamps

Premium Fog Lamps

Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps

Exterior Bulbs

H13

Bulb Number

LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

7442NALL


7440NA

7443


PSX24W



Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb

Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb

Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp

License Lamp

3157

7440




NOTE:

Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

6


Bulb Replacement

NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions occur to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor.

Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Halogen Headlamps

NOTE:

We advise referring to an authorized dealer for service.

1. Open hood and support using prop rod.

2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Pull the bottom of the grille away, starting at one side and working toward the other.

4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to the vehicle.

5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.

6. Remove the lamp from the collar.

7. Grasp the bulb and turn a quarter turn counterclockwise.

8. Pull the bulb from the housing.

9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.

10. Remove connector from bulb.

11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the connector locking tab to the lock position.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter turn clockwise.

Front Park/Turn Signal

NOTE:


1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access bulb sockets.

Wheel Liner

2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.


LED Front Side Marker

1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access side maker screw and electrical connector.

2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.

3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light assembly.

Halogen Front Fog Lamp

NOTE:


1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front fog lamp.

2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front fog lamp connector receptacle.

3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.

6


CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

LED Front Fog Lamp

If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are replaced as an assembly.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp

1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet metal.

2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward, far enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the the outer box side panel.

lamp housing, from the two plastic snap post retainers in

3. Remove the screws from assembly bracket to access the three bulb sockets.

Assembly Bracket

Tail Lamp Screws

4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn counter clockwise, then remove it from the housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The stop lamp is mounted on the tailgate. If service is needed, obtain the LED assembly from an authorized dealer.

License Plate Lamps

See an authorized dealer to replace these LED assemblies.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/ or disengaged.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine contact an authorized dealer.

system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,


The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive elec trical current.

When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.

Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for an extended periods of time with the engine off it may result in vehicle battery discharge.

6


Blade Fuses

1 — Fuse Element

2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element

3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse)

Power Distribution Center (PDC)

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.

NOTE:

Fuses for safety systems (marked with *) must be serviced by an authorized dealer.

Power Distribution Center

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

Cavity

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

F06

F07

F08

F09

Cartridge Fuse

–

40 Amp Green

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

–

–

5 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

5 Amp Tan

–

–

15 Amp Blue

–

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

25 Amp Clear

–

–

15 Amp Blue


Description

Spare

Starter

Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM

Security Gateway

Spare

Spare

Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS

Spare

Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub

(RF HUB)/Electric Steering Column Lock

(ESCL)

UCI Port (USB & AUX)

HIFI Amplifier

Spare

Spare

Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch

BANK-HD ELEC)

Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical Pkg (SWITCH

6


Cavity

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

F23

F24

F25

F26

F27

F28

F29

–

–

–

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

Micro Fuse

–

–

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

Description

Spare

Spare

Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)

Spare

Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR

LIGHTS

Spare

Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain

Control Module (PCM)

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine

Control Module (ECM)

Spare

Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)

Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR

LIGHTS #1

Front Wipers

Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER

LOCKS

Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR

LIGHTS #2

F33

F34

F35

F36

F37

F38

F39

F40

Cavity

F30

F31

F32

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue

–

–

Micro Fuse

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

–

15 Amp Blue


Description

Spare

DIAGNOSTIC PORT

Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod

(HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering Column Lock

Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)

(SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/

ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera

Module (IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps

(AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric

Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar

Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP

BRAKE VAC PMP - If Equipped

TRAILER TOW MOD - If Equipped

TRAILER TOW CONN 7W - If Equipped

Engine Control Module ECM

Spare

Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock

(AXLE LOC) FT_RR

6


Cavity

F41

Cartridge Fuse

–

F42

F47

F48

F49

F50

F43

F44

F45

F46

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

F51

F52

F53

F54

F55

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

–

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

Description

Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay

(SGW) WAKE UP

Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric

Stop/Start)

Spare

Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS

Spare

AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW

Spare

Spare

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

HD ACC - If Equipped

Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter

400W Wake Up/USB/InSide RearView Mirror

(ISRVM)/Compass Module (CSGM)

Cigar Lighter

Wireless Speaker - If Equipped

Spare

Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM) or

Parktronics Module

Cavity

F56

F57

F58

F59

F60

F61

F66

F67

F68

F69

F70

F71

F72

F62

F63

F64

F65

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

50 Amp Red

40 Amp Green

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

–

–

25 Amp Clear

–

10 Amp Red


Description

In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed

Frt Drvr Htd Seat

Frt Pass Htd Seat

Spare

Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD

STR WHEEL)

Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot

Sensor (RBSS)

Spare

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Spare

Power Inverter 400W

HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT

Spare

Spare

Spare

INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)

Spare

HD ELEC ACC PKG - If Equipped

6

F80

F81

F82

F83

F84

F85

F86

F87

F88

Cavity

F73

F74

F75

F76

F77

F78

F79


Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

60 Amp Yellow

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

20 Amp Blue

Micro Fuse

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

20 Amp Yellow

15 Amp Blue

–

–

–

–

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

–

Description

Spare

Spare

Spare

ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)

Heated Mirrors

Spare

SMART BAR CTRL MOD

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid 1 2

Block Shift

REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)

FUEL HTR - If Equipped

GLOW PLUG - If Equipped

UREA HTR CTRL UNIT - If Equipped

PM SENSOR - If Equipped

Spare

SUPPLY/PURGING PMP - If Equipped

NOx SENSOR #1/#2 - If Equipped

Cavity

F89

F90

F91

F92

F93

F94

F95

F96

F97

F98

F99

F100

F101

F102

F103

F104

Cartridge Fuse

–

20 Amp Blue

–

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

10 Amp Red

–

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

–


Description

Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/

Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV

(DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp

TRAILER TOW PARK LMP - If Equipped

Horn

HD ACCY #2 - If Equipped


Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system

(CORAX)

Spare

PWR MIRROR SW

RADIO/TBM

SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD

Spare

ESC-ECU & VALVES

Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)

DUAL USB PORT


Spare

6


Cavity

F105

F106

F107

F108

F109

F110

F111

Cartridge Fuse

–

50 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Blue

Micro Fuse

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to result in an electrical system failure.

get into the power distribution center and possibly

(Continued)

10 Amp Red

–

20 Amp Yellow

15 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

Description

Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation

Air Conditioning (HVAC)

Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR

TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT - If Equipped


TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT - If Equipped

Spare

TRAILER TOW BACKUP - If Equipped

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to or changing the wheel.

avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be pery areas.

jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip -


Jack Location

The jack and jack tools are stored under the right rear seat. To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:

1. Fold up the right rear seat.

2. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt coun terclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift the assembly out from under the seat.

Jack And Tools

6


3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools from bag.

4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.

Jack And Tool Bag


There are two ways to assemble the tools:


CAUTION!

• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.

• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism adjusting nut.

• Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch mech anism may occur from improper tool assembly

6

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising

1 — Lug Wrench

2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2

3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3

4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4

NOTE:

If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with hook can be without having to raise the tailgate.

added to this assembly to enable lowering of the spare tire

Assembled For Jack Operation

1 — Lug Wrench

2 — Long Extension 2



5 — Short Extension With Hook


WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in the original carrier and location. While driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns.

A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting in serious injury.

Spare Tire Removal

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.

2. Insert the extension tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Winch Mechanism Tube

Access Hole Location


3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole

Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle

6


4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Pulling The Spare Tire Out

5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

Pulling The Retainer Through The

Center Of The Wheel

NOTE:

The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension recommended and can damage the winch.

tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not


Preparations For Jacking

1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to wheel.

avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a manual transmission into REVERSE.

5. Cycle the ignition to OFF.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

Wheel Blocked

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked in position.

6


Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.

• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission to

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

Warning Label

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored loca tion.

2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do not remove) by turning them counter clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.


4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.

Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

6

Front Jack Lifting Point

Assembled Jack And Tools


Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the ground surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

Rear Jack Lifting Point

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.

8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has in serious injury.

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclock wise, and remove the jack.


10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque

Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for correct lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho rized dealer or service station.

11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.

13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.

6

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.

Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.


To Stow The Flat Or Spare

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.

Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing upward and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

Reinstalling The Retainer

3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the access hole between the winch mechanism tube. lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the


Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And

In Position

4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.

Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism ened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place. slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtight -

Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle

NOTE:

The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension recommended and can damage the winch.

tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not

6


Reinstalling The Jack And Tools

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.

2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.

5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.


3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, place the jack and tools under the rear seat.

Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt

WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in the original carrier and location. While driving you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools or bracket or other objects in the injury.

vehicle may move around with force, resulting in serious

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump follow the procedures in this section carefully.

starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12

Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.


Preparations For Jump Start

Supplemental Battery — If Equipped

WARNING!

• Only use the positive battery post on the main battery to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or death supplemental battery.

could result if you attempt to jump start using the

(Continued)

6


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting.

The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment.

Positive Battery Post

NOTE:

The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap.

Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.

Positive Battery Post Cover

If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will be equipped with two batteries. Refer to “Stop/Start System

— If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.


WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis sion into PARK (P) (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and place the ignition in OFF mode.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

6


WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Jump Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

NOTE:

Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are connections.

not contacting each other or either vehicle while making

Connecting The Jumper Cables

Jumper Cable Connections

1. Connect the positive

(+)

end of the jumper cable to the remote positive

(+)

post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive

(+)

jumper cable to the positive

(+)

post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end

(-)

of the jumper cable to the negative

(-)


4. Connect the opposite end of the negative

(-)

jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the the fuel injection system.

discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in not use any other exposed metal parts.

personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:


Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative

(-)

end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative

(-)

jumper cable from the negative

(-)


3. Disconnect the positive

(+)

end of the jumper cable from the positive

(+)


4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive

(+)

jumper cable from the remote positive

(+)


5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive

(+)


If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at an authorized dealer.

6


CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use

(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery prevent the engine from starting.

will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the poten tial for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into

NEUTRAL (N) , but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to cooling system.

the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant

(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to coolant bottle is hot.

open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park

Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the

Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious

To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a

Manual Park Release is available.

Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:



2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the manual park release cover located in front of the gear selector, to access the release tether strap.

Manual Park Release Cover

6


3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base.

Tether Strap

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until the release lever locks into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the connected to a tow vehicle.

parking brake only when the vehicle is securely

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the

“locked” position.

2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and to the right, into its original position.

3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console, and reinstall the cover.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.

For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR (2) and REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:

• For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between

DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL(N) for more than 2

(D) or REVERSE (R).

seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE

• Push the "ESC OFF" switch to place the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system in "Partial OFF" mode before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in

“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been

ON" mode.

freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to restore "ESC

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

continuously without stopping when you are stuck and


CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch a stuck vehicle.

or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between

DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin damage may result.

the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 ring).

mph

(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occur -

6


TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And

Operating” section.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Flatbed

NONE

Front

Rear

ALL

4WD MODELS

See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating”.

• Automatic Transmission in

PARK (P)

• Manual Transmission in gear (

NOT

in NEUTRAL)

• Transfer Case in

NEUTRAL (N)

• Tow in

forward

direction

NOT ALLOWED

NOT ALLOWED

BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equip ment designed for this purpose, following equipment manu facturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.

Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated must be observed.

brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park

Release" in this section for instructions on shifting the auto matic transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.

-

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Four–Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels

OFF

the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a end on a towing dolly.

flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite

If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with

ALL

wheels on the ground),

NEUTRAL (N)

IF

the transfer case is in

and the transmission is in

PARK (P)

(for automatic transmissions) or in gear (

NOT

in

NEUTRAL

, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.


CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

6


Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are mounted in the front and the rear bumpers.

NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the

Rear Tow Hook

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.

Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

Front Tow Hook

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.

your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident

Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response

System (EARS) function.


EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

6

436

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indi cator system. The oil change indicator system will remind tenance.

you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled main -

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi cator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe

Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.

Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display,

“Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster display, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in mation.

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor -

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed

10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or is operated predominately at idle considered Severe Duty.

or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

• Change oil and filter

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• Rotate the tires

NOTE:

Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

• Inspect the CV/Universal joints

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses

• Inspect exhaust system

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

• Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary

7

438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE:

Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Inspect front suspension, rear suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.

Inspect the front and rear axle fluid.

Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.

Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.

X

X

X

X

X

Inspect transfer case fluid.

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X



Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.

1

Flush and replace the engine coolant at

10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km), whichever comes first.

Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

2 3

X

4 5 6

X

X

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

7



Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

X X X

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.6L Engine


7

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Battery

3 — Engine Oil Dipstick

4 — Engine Oil Fill

5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

10 — Engine Air Cleaner


Checking Oil Level

To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The engine engine has been shut off.

oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always main tain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.

Adding 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.

bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at the

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reser voir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.

They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte nance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case

Of Emergency” for further information.

skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Bot the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener gize the 12 Volt electrical system.



CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.

Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corro sion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped with two batteries. Both the main and the supplemental batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener gize the 12 Volt electrical system.

• If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in the system, resulting in damage to essential electrical components.

7


Pressure Washing

CAUTION!

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

DEALER SERVICE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle.

Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any proce dure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may assessed against you.

void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any your vehicle to a competent mechanic.


Engine Oil

Change Engine Oil

Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Mainte nance” for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed

10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run

Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manu facturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and

10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine

Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” in this section.


Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its perfor -

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.

7


Contact an authorized dealer, service station, or govern mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recom mended.

filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled

Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement

Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner cover using a suitable tool.


2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

7

1 — Retainers

2 — Air Filter Cover

Air Cleaner Filter Cover


3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.

Air Cleaner Filter

1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

2 — Air Cleaner Filter

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a suitable tool.

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of igni tion mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any your vehicle to a competent mechanic.


When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks, that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is not a reason to replace the belt. However,

cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. In frayed cords, or severe glazing.

addition, have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)

• Rib or belt wear

• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)

• Belt slips


• “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)

• Belt broken

• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

NOTE:

Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

7


WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor mation Book, located online, for further warranty infor mation.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a-If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon

(HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Polyalkylene

Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R-1234yf

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin

(HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection

Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.


Air Conditioning (A/C) Filter Replacement

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and lower the door.

Glove Compartment Travel Stop

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

7


4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the air filter access door to the HVAC housing.

Air Filter Retaining Tabs

5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.

Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right for clearance.

Air Filter

6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indica tors pointing in the same direction as removal.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly often.

install the filter will result in the need to replace it more

7. Close A/C air filter access door and secure retaining tabs.

8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position, ensuring you have properly engaged the travel damper.

Travel Dampener

1 — Travel Dampener Housing

2 — Travel Dampener Rod


Servicing” in this chapter for the proper maintenance inter vals.


Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors, and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar

Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function.

When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a cant, directly into the lock cylinder.

high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri -

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the wind shield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild or road film.

nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt

7


Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petro leum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines, or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected peri odically, not just when wiper performance problems are points: experienced. This inspection should include the following

• Wear or uneven edges

• Foreign material

• Hardening or cracking

• Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.


2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade, and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm

3 —Release Tab

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm J Hook

3 — J Hook Retainer

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

7


Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm.

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrica tion or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventu ally poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety

Tips” in “Safety” for further information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.

Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device, may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, damage to the converter and vehicle.

cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.


To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan the engine is running or not.

starts automatically and may start at any time, whether

(Continued)

7


WARNING!

(Continued)

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at

Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every

12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appear ance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down radiator core.

the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire

SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES -

Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.

Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with

OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica tions” for further information.

NOTE:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than specified

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant

(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene mended.

glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom -

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to dealer.

be added to the system please contact an authorized

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant

(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte -


nance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile (240,000

Standard MS.90032.

km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.

(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)

• Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deionized water, when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the system.

amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling

7


NOTE:

• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the tempera tures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to dealer.

be added to the system, please contact a local authorized

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (anti freeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accu mulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or

HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.

Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assis tance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for deter mining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine in the OFF mode and cold, the level of the engine coolant (anti freeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be

Points To Remember

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of mois ture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the


radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the freezing point of the coolant (antifreeze) in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If determined that more engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added to must also be protected against freezing.

the radiator, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

7


• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter oper ation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsat isfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled Servicing” intervals.

in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake in an emergency.

damage. You would not have your full braking capacity

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.

Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced.

If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica tions” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci fications” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

system and/or impair its performance. The proper type

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.


Front/Rear Axle Fluid

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected, inspect the fluid level. Refer to further information.

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

Fluid Level Check

Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.

NOTE:

Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the axles.

Adding Fluid

Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level spec ified above.

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

7


Transfer Case


Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.


The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position.

Drain And Refill


Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped


Use only manufacturer's recommended manual transmis sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specifications” for further information.


Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a bottom of the hole.

point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76

mm) below the

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Transfer Case

1 — Fill Hole

2 — Drain Hole

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to the

“Maintenance Plan” located in “Scheduled Servicing” in intervals.

“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance



It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid spec ifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.


CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specifications” for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmis sion. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

7

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components.

Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.



The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated

(with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

RAISING THE VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,

Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire

Loading.

Tire Markings

Tire Markings

1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades


NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into

P215/65R15 95H.

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the

• High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the side wall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

7


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P

= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...."

= Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT

= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S

= Temporary spare tire, or

31

= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145

= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80

= Aspect ratio in percent (%)

• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5

= Section width in inches (in)

R

= Construction code

• "R" means radial construction, or

• "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18

= Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95

= Load Index

• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry


EXAMPLE:

H

= Speed Symbol

• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain oper ating conditions

• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions

(i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

•

XL

= Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL

= Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G

= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load

– Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure

– Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the

7


EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT

= Department of Transportation

• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA

= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9

= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD

= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03

= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 03 means the 3rd week

01

= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 01 means the year 2001

• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991


Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-Pillar

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

the front door.

Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

(1.6

km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

7


Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the door.

driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recom mended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.


Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres sures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle be exceeded. weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not

For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue enced here.

weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer -

7


Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu

-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

650 lbs.) and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely calculated in Step 4.

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340

(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and of your vehicle.

may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity

• For the following example, the combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended


7


Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satis factory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety

• Fuel Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.

Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.

You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.


CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture damage the valve stem.

and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6

km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla -

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tempera ture changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the

Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C), and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation

1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

7


Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important.

Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading, and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.

The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (side wall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and addi tional information.

If equipped with Run Flat tires, and they are damaged, or experience a loss of pressure, should be replaced immedi ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run

Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the Tire Pressure

Monitoring (TPM) sensor, as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa tion.


Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h), or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer gency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are matter what the speed.

stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no

7


Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

Tire Tread

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6

mm). When the tread is worn

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor mation.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure — Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rota tion of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could injury or death.

lose control and have a collision resulting in serious

NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little expo sure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality, and performance when replace ment is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the

Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety

Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.


It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make inal wheels.

sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the orig -

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combi nations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteris tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension compo nents. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

7


WARNING!

(Continued)

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could control and have a collision.

result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the vehicle.

to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware, these

Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient tempera tures are less than 40°F (5°C), or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “moun tain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires that are equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original equip ment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.


Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare gency” for further information.

tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emer -

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

Damage to the vehicle may result.

compact or limited use temporary spare installed.

Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting And

Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel

— If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.

This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

7


Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven tional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to failure and loss of vehicle control.

your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equip ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.

Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only.

Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your

Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.

Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side


Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild

(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

recommended for the body of the vehicle, and remember to

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.

They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

7

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.

Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited equivalent is recommended.

Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or


When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage

Cleaner, or their equivalent, is recommended or select a to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome wheels.

non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive lets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water drop -

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss

Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,

DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD

SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a finish.

regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this

Tire Chains (Traction Devices)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only.

• 245/75R17 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recommended.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used.

Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device before further use.

device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the

• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8

km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

(Continued)


CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc tions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested oper ating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and rates.

braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.

Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.


Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

7


The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross” shown in the following diagram.

Tire Rotation

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to followed to balance tire wear.

the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road charac

-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor

-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C


corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

(Continued)

7


WARNING!

(Continued)



CAUTION!

If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in the system, resulting in damage to essential electrical components.

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system then disconnect both the main and supplemental negative battery cables.

• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

• If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery system, see your authorized dealer.

Battery Cable Disconnect

1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable

2 — Main Negative Battery Cable

3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal

NOTE:

• You must isolate the supplemental battery connection point, as well as the main battery terminal from the post, as shown in the image, to fully de-energize both batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery system, see your authorized dealer.

• Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not function for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS being set into learn mode.

BODYWORK

Protection From Atmospheric Agents

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather, and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.


What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation

• Stone and gravel impact

• Insects, tree sap and tar

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants

Body And Underbody Maintenance

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To by rinsing.

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed

7


Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool, or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Preserving The Bodywork

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clean water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar

Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner

Wax, to remove road film and stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials, such as steel wool or scouring powder, that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well pack aged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models

To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior trim and top, follow these precautions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim.

• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top mate rial, as damage may result.

• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.

• After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make sure it is completely dry before lowering.

• Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top Window” in this section.

Washing –

Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top entire top, but support the top from underneath.

Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the

Rinsing –

Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it.


CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.

7


Care Of Fabric Top Window

Your vehicle's fabric top has a pliable plastic window that can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions:

• Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,

use a micro fiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the window, not up and down.

Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean the plastic window without scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.

• When washing,

never use hot water

or anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

• Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

• When removing frost, snow, or ice,

never use a scraper or de-icing chemicals.

Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly.

• Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road driving will have an impact on plastic retainer operation.

Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window plastic retainer operation. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic retainers, each window plastic retainer should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a mild soap solution and a authorized dealer.

small brush. Cleaning products are available through an

• Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the window.

INTERIORS

Carpet Removal

Front Carpets:

1. Remove the front grommets.


2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.

Front Carpet Pulled Away

7

1 — Grommets

Front Carpet


3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for the rear carpet and then the front carpet.

Front And Rear Carpet Split

4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet to the front

(do not remove the harness).

1 — Harness

2 — Carpet Split

Rear Underside Of Front Seat

5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and then remove the last two grommets.

6. When reinstalling carpet, perform these steps in reverse order, making sure that the carpet is tucked under the mets.

scuffs, B pillar, and console, and then refasten the grom -

Rear Carpet

1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and one right).


5. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt coun terclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift the assembly out from under the seat.

6. Lift carpet off of the rear retainers (one left and one right).

Carpet Split

1 — Grommet

2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the carpet split around the front seat brackets.

3. Remove the rear Under Seat storage bin (if equipped), by removing the four bolts that hold it to the floor.

4. Remove the fastener bin from the rear floor, it is held in by clips.

Rear Retainers

7. Remove carpet from the vehicle.

8. When reinstalling the carpet, perform these steps in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B pillar, console, and then refasten the grom mets.

7


Seats And Fabric Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Seat Belt Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or luke warm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

Plastic And Coated Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cloth.

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather Parts

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total

Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a


NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.

FCA recommends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner applied

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with

Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped that may scratch the elements.

antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

7

500

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the A pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears under body, on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of the engine block.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems.

If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capa bility, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt

Torque

130 Ft-Lbs

(176 N·m)

**Lug Nut/Bolt

Size

M14 x 1.50

mm

Lug Nut/Bolt

Socket Size

22 mm

**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

8

502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/ bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).

Torque Patterns

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has in personal injury.

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.

use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy line with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso -


Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these service for the vehicle.

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved components.

performance and durability of engine and fuel system

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

8


Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in mini mizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com

for a list of TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen ates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with

Warranty.

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed

Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with

MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso line retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal law and California reformulated gaso line.

Fuel System Cautions


CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine, certain fuel or ignition malfunc tions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

8


NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.

Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

running for an extended period. If the vehicle is

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions windows fully open.

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side


FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L Engine

Cooling System *

3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

Formula or equivalent)

*Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

Component

Engine Coolant

Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine

U.S.

22 Gallons

5 Quarts

11.2 Quarts

Metric

83 Liters

4.73 Liters

10.6 Liters

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032.

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine

Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

8


Component

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive

Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any

“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh rized dealer as soon as possible.

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho -

(Continued)


We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

(Continued)

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhib itors or antirust products, as they may not be compat ible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti freeze) is not recommended.

Chassis

Component

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

Transfer Case

Axle Differential (Front Axles)

Axle Differential (Rear M200 Sales Code DRZ)

Axle Differential (Rear M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)

Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir



Use only Mopar ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic

Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE

75W85) (API GL-5)


75W140) (API GL-5).


75W85) (API GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited

Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE

J1703.

We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump

Fluid.

8

510

MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS

For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa tion. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US

LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com

(U.S. Resi dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept informa tion and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard

Know Your Instrument Panel”.

Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To

MULTIMEDIA 511

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate, located on the change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

center of the instrument panel, that allow you to access and

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen.

Buttons on the faceplate can be located below and beside the

Uconnect system. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

center of the control knob one or more times to select or

Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off or Mute button on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the

Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back Arrow/X button (if equipped) on the touch screen to exit out of a Menu or certain options on the

Uconnect system.

9

512 MULTIMEDIA

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3

Settings

Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On

The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Push the Settings button to display the settings menu screen.

In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features.

NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selec tion. Once the setting is selected, press the Back Arrow/

Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow Buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/

RUN position.

The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

MULTIMEDIA 513

Language

After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Language

English Español Français

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Display Mode

Brightness

Auto

+

Manual

-

NOTE:

The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen.

Touchscreen Beep

On Off

Units

After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Units

US Metric Custom

NOTE:

• The “Metric” option changes the Instrument Cluster Display to metric units of measure.

measure independently.

9

514 MULTIMEDIA

Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


time.

Set Time and Format

12 hr

AM

24 hr

PM

NOTE:

Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct

Show Time Status — If Equipped

Sync Time — If Equipped

NOTE:

By selecting On/Off, this setting will Sync the time to the system’s GPS.

On

On

Off

Off

Camera

After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


ParkView Backup Camera Delay

On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the tion.

vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi -

MULTIMEDIA 515


ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines

On

Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines

On Off

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Forward Collision

Warning — If Equipped

Forward Collision

Warning Sensitivity —

If Equipped

Off

Near

Warning Only

Med

Warning & Braking

Far

ParkSense — If

Equipped

Sound Only Sound & Display

NOTE:

The Rear Park Assist system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).

9

516 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Front ParkSense - If

Equipped

Rear ParkSense Volume

— If Equipped

Blind Spot Alert — If

Equipped

Low

Low

Off

Selectable Options

Medium

Medium

Lights

High

High

Lights & Chime

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.

Hill Start Assist

On Off

Tire Fill Assist

Lights

After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Headlight Off Delay

0 sec

60 sec

30 sec

90 sec

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.

MULTIMEDIA 517

Setting Name

Headlight Illumination On Approach

Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped

Daytime Running Lights

+

On

On


-

Off

Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped

On Off

Interior Ambient Lights

+ -

NOTE:

The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Auto Door Locks — If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

9

518 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Auto Unlock On Exit

On


Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the driver's door is opened when the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.

Off

Flash Lights With Lock

Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped

Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped

Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock

On

Off

On

Driver

1st Press

Off

All

2nd Press

NOTE:

When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive

Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).

Passive Entry — If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.

MULTIMEDIA 519

Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If

Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera tures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



0 sec

60 sec

30 sec

90 sec

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.

Doors On Engine Off Power Delay

Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay

+

+ -

-

9

520 MULTIMEDIA

Aux Switches

After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Aux 1-4

Type

Power Source

Recalled Last State

Latching

Battery

NOTE:


Momentary

Ignition

Compass Settings — If Equipped

After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Variance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

NOTE:

• Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will auto matically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.

• Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar

Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

MULTIMEDIA 521

Setting Name

Perform Compass

Calibration

On


Off

NOTE:

Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.

Audio

After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Equalizer

Bass


Mid

Balance/Fade

Treble

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/

Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

Up Arrow

Button

Down Arrow

Button

Left Arrow

Button

Right Arrow

Button

Center C

Button

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front/rear or right/left side speakers. Press the C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.

9

522 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Speed Adjusted Volume

Off 1


Surround Sound — If Equipped

Loudness

On

On

NOTE:

The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.

AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

+

2

Off

Off

3

-

NOTE:

The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the

AUX input.

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Paired Phones

List of Paired Phones

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Oper ation” in “Uconnect 3 with 5-inch display” section.

MULTIMEDIA 523

SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Channel Skip

List of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude unde sirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Info

Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the re-subscribe. expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to

1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

9

524 MULTIMEDIA

Restore Settings To Default

After pressing the Restore Settings To Default button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



OK

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.

Cancel

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



OK Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4

Settings

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen And Face plate Buttons



Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or press the

Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touch screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the

Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features.

MULTIMEDIA 525

NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is selected, either press the

Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you

The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

9

526 MULTIMEDIA

Language



Language

English Espanol Francais

Display



Display Mode

Display Brightness Headlights On

Auto

+

Display Brightness Headlights Off


Auto-Show Smartphone Display Upon Connection

Control Screen Timeout - If Equipped

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster

+

On

On

On

On

Manual

-

-

Off

Off

Off

Off

MULTIMEDIA 527

Units



Units

US Metric

NOTE:

Custom

• The “Metric” option changes the Instrument Cluster Display to metric units of measure.

• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measure independently.

Voice

After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Voice Response Length

Show Command List

Brief

Always With Help

Detailed

Clock

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

Set Time Hours

Never


On

+

Off

-

9

528 MULTIMEDIA


NOTE:

The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Set Time Minutes

+ -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Time Format

Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped

12 hrs

On

24 hrs

Off

Camera — If Equipped

After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


NOTE:


On Off

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

MULTIMEDIA 529

Setting Name

Active ParkView Backup Camera


NOTE:

The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ receiver.

Fixed ParkView Backup Camera

On Off

Front Camera Gridlines

Auto Launch Off Road+

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Forward Facing Camera

Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped

After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

ParkSense — If Equipped

Off

Near

Sound

Warning Only

Med

Warning & Braking

Far

Sound & Display

NOTE:


9

530 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Front ParkSense Volume


Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

Low

Low

Off


Medium

Medium

Lights

High

High

Lights & Chime

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.

sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is

NOTE:


On Off


Active ParkView Backup Camera

On Off

NOTE:

The “Active ParkView Backup Camera” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ receiver.

Fixed ParkView Backup Camera

On Off

Front Camera Gridlines


Off

On Off

Forward Facing Camera

MULTIMEDIA 531

Setting Name



On


Off

Lights




0 sec

60 sec

30 sec

90 sec

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.




+

+

Yes

-

-

No

NOTE:


9

532 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

On


Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.


On Off

Doors & Locks




On Off

NOTE:



On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.


On Off



Remote Door Unlock/Door Lock

Off

On

Driver

1st Press

Off

All

2nd Press

MULTIMEDIA 533


NOTE:

When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive

Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).

Passive Entry - If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.

Engine Off Options — If Equipped





+

+ -

-

NOTE:



+ -

9

534 MULTIMEDIA

Aux Switches — If Equipped

After pressing the Aux Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Aux 1-4

Type

Power Source

Recalled Last State

Latching

Battery

NOTE:


Momentary

Ignition

Audio



Balance & Fade

Speaker Icon

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Balance & Fade of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.

Equalizer

Bass Mid Treble

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/

Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

MULTIMEDIA 535

Setting Name


Off


1 2


Loudness

+

NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Yes

-

No

NOTE:

The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.

Auto Play

On Off

NOTE:

The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.

Auto On Radio — If Equipped

Radio Off With Door — If Equipped

On

On

Off

Off



Setting Name

Do Not Disturb


Do Not Disturb Options

3

9

536 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Paired Phones And Audio Devices


List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display” section.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster

On Off




Channel Skip

List Of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

NOTE:


Sirius ID

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the re-subscribe.

expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to



MULTIMEDIA 537





NOTE:

When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.

OK Cancel


After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



OK

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

Cancel

9

538 MULTIMEDIA

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/

4C NAV Settings

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons



Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features.

NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is selected, either press the

Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you

The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

MULTIMEDIA 539

Language



Set Language

English Español Français

NOTE:

When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Display


Setting Name

Display Mode

Display Brightness With Headlights ON


Manual

+

Auto

-

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

On Off

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

9

540 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Theme


Set Theme

NOTE:

When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button selected.

on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been


Control Screen Time-Out

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:

When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.

Auto Launch with Off Road +

Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in

Cluster

Off

On

Forward Camera Off Road Pages

Off

NOTE:

When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster

On Off

MULTIMEDIA 541

Units



Units

US Metric

NOTE:

Custom

• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.

• The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and

“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently.

Voice

After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Voice Response Length

Show Command List

Brief

Always With Help

Detailed

Clock

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

Never


On Off

9

542 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Set Time Hours


+ -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Set Time Minutes

+ -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Time Format

Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped

12hrs

On

24hrs

Off

Camera

After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



On Off

NOTE:


MULTIMEDIA 543

Setting Name

ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines

On


Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path, based on the steering wheel position, when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines

On Off

Front Camera Gridelines

On Off


Off

Forward Facing

Camera

Off Road Pages

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

Off

Near

Warning

Only

Med

Warning &

Braking

Far

9

544 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

ParkSense — If Equipped

Sound Only


Sound & Display

NOTE:


Front ParkSense Volume

Low Medium High


Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

Low

Off

Medium

Lights

High

Lights &

Chime

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.

sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is



On Off

MULTIMEDIA 545

Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If

Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver’s vented seat will turn on.

Doors & Locks




On Off

NOTE:



On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, and the driver's door is opened when the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.




On

Off

On

1st Press

Off

Off

2nd Press

9

546 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

Driver Door


All Doors

NOTE:

When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When "All

Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.

If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).

Passive Entry — If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

MULTIMEDIA 547

Aux Switches — If Equipped

After pressing the Aux Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Aux 1-4

Type

Power Source

Recalled Last State

Latching

Battery

NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

Momentary

Ignition

Audio



Balance/Fade

Speaker Icon

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.

Equalizer

Bass Mid Treble

NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

buttons or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow

9

548 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name


Off


1 2


+

NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

-


3



Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster

On

Do Not Disturb

Paired Phones And Audio Devices

Do Not Disturb Options

Off

List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to "Phone Operation" in "Uconnect 3 with 5-inch display" section.

Engine Off Options





+

+

-

-

MULTIMEDIA 549



0 sec 30 sec off.

60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut

Lights




0 sec

60 sec

30 sec

90 sec

NOTE:



+ -


Yes No

NOTE:



On Off

9

550 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name


+


-

NOTE:

The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.

Mirrors and Wipers

After pressing the Mirrors and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

On Off




Channel Skip

List Of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to include desired channels and exclude undesired channels. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

MULTIMEDIA 551

Setting Name



Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. Following the re-subscribe.

expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to



SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.




Reset App Drawer

Restore Apps

OK

Back

Cancel

Next

NOTE:

Restoring Apps will delete all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or installing apps. To restore apps, press the Next button in the pop-up screen, and then press “Yes” on the confirmation screen. To keep installed apps, press

“Cancel.”

9

552 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Restore Settings

OK


NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.

Cancel


Yes Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

System Information — If Equipped

After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


the radio.

Software Licenses

Software Information Screen

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for

Map Update

Download System

Information To USB

Generate Request Code

NOTE:

The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. “Generate

Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.

SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION

Safety Guidelines

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.

Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage.

• Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake.

MULTIMEDIA 553

• Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for repair.

• Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehi cles.

Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System

• Read all instructions in this manual carefully before using your system to ensure proper usage.

• The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic device.

Do not let young children use the system.

• Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or the system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system.

• Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device.

NOTE:

Many features of this system are speed dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.

9

554 MULTIMEDIA

Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

Care And Maintenance

Touchscreen

• Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen surface!

• Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.

• If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.

UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY

Introduction

Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display

1 — RADIO

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter Radio

Mode. The different tuner modes; FM/AM/SXM (if equipped), can be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode.

2 — COMPASS

Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to display the current direction of the vehicle.

3 — SETTINGS

Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to display the customer programmable features.

4 — MORE

Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.

5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL

Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune to a radio station.

6 — SCREEN OFF

Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the touchscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back on, press the screen.

MULTIMEDIA 555

7 — MUTE

Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of the radio system. Press it again to turn the audio back on.

8 — VOLUME/POWER

Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume. Push the

VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system ON or OFF.

9 — PHONE

Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to access the

Uconnect Phone feature.

10 — MEDIA

Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will allow you to switch to Media mode: CD (if equipped), USB, AUX, and

Bluetooth®.

9

556 MULTIMEDIA

Radio Mode

Operating Radio Mode

1 — Station Presets

2 — All Presets

3 — Seek Up

4 — Audio

5 — Info

6 — Tune

7 — AM/FM/SXM

8 — Seek Down

Radio Mode

The radio is equipped with the following modes:

• FM

• AM

• SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to enter the Radio

Mode. The different tuner modes – FM/AM/SXM (if equipped) – can then be selected by pressing the corre sponding buttons on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.

VOLUME/POWER Knob

Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to adjust the

Volume. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system on or off.

MUTE Button

Push the MUTE button to mute the system. Push the MUTE button again to unmute the system.

TUNE/SCROLL Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station selection.

frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a

Seek Functions

Seek Up

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Up

Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

MULTIMEDIA 557

During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Down

Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

Direct Tune Functions

Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to directly tune to a specific radio station. A keypad will appear. On the will automatically tune to it.

keypad, enter in your desired radio station, and the system

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If Equipped

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.

Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and entertainment. Get all the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL® game,

9

558 MULTIMEDIA

every MLB®, every NHL® game, every NASCAR® race,

Martha Stewart, Oprah Radio, and more. Get 20+ extra chan nels, including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial-free music, news, talk, comedy, sports, and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.

SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at

1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agree ment for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com

(US Resi dents) or www.siriusxm.ca

(Canadian Residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contig uous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also avail able in Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in Alaska and Hawai. © 2019 SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.

If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may need to change the vehicle’s position to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in under ground parking garages or tunnels.

Setting Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes and are acti vated by pressing any of the four Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button hear a confirmation beep.

on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you

The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes.

Four presets are visible at the top of the radio screen.

Audio Settings

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side of the radio faceplate. If the settings button is not present, push the on the touchscreen.

MORE button on the faceplate, then the Settings button

2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the touch screen to open the Audio menu.

3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings:

•

Auto Play

— Press the Auto Play button on the touch screen to select between ON or OFF. This feature deter mines if music automatically starts playing from a device when it is first connected to the Media hub’s

USB port.

•

Equalizer

— Press the Equalizer button on the touch screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble. Use the + or

•

– buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. Press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.

Balance/Fade

— Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the speakers. Use the arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.

•

Speed Adjust Volume

— Press the Speed Adjusted

Volume button on the touchscreen to select between

OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume rela -

MULTIMEDIA 559

tive to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press the Back

Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.

•

Loudness

— Press the Loudness button on the touch screen to select the Loudness feature. When this feature volumes.

is activated, it improves sound quality at lower

Clock Settings

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, or push the

MORE button on the faceplate, and then the SETTINGS button on the touchscreen.

2. Select the Clock and Date button on the touchscreen.

3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.

4. Select Set Date to change the date.

5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs vs 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time Zones” (if equipped).

6. Select the Done button when complete.

9

560 MULTIMEDIA

Media Mode

Operating Media Mode

1 — Seek Down

2 — Seek Up

3 — Additional Functions

4 — Info

5 — Pause/Play

6 — Source

7 — Browse

Media Mode

Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.

Audio Source Selection

Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touch screen and the desired mode button on the touchscreen. Disc

(if equipped), USB, SD Card (if equipped), AUX and Blue tooth® (if equipped), are the Media sources available. When available, you can select the Browse button on the touch screen to be given these options:

• Now Playing

• Artists

• Albums

• Genres

• Songs

• Playlists

• Folders

You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button on the touchscreen for artist information on the current song playing.

Seek Up/Seek Down Functions

Seek Up /Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the track is within the first few seconds of the current selec tion.

Fast Seek Up

Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to fast forward through the current track until the button on the touchscreen is released.

Fast Seek Down

Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to rewind through the current track until the button on the touchscreen is released.

Track Selection (Browse)

Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired track on the iPod®, MP3 player,

MULTIMEDIA 561

phone, or USB. Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.

Repeat

Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selec tions on the USB/iPod® or Bluetooth® device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the feature off.

Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this

Track Info

Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the X button on the touch screen to cancel this feature.

Audio

Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable audio settings.

9

562 MULTIMEDIA

USB/iPod® Mode

USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump

Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port, or by pushing the

MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in Media the USB/iPod® button.

Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen, and select

Inserting USB/iPod® Device

Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/iPod® mode and begin to play when you insert the device. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Browse

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to select Artist,

Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or Folders from the USB/ iPod® device. Once the desired selection is made you can chose from the available media by pressing the button on the wish to cancel the Browse function.

touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you

Bluetooth® Mode

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device containing music to the Uconnect system.

Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect system.

Refer to “Phone Mode” section for pairing procedure.

Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.

Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touch screen and select the Bluetooth® button.

NOTE:

For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com

.

AUX Mode

AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device using a stereo cable with a 3.5

mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once and select the AUX button.

in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen,

Inserting Auxiliary Device

Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable.

Controlling The Auxiliary Device

The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the device.

VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the attached

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.

Phone Mode

Operating Phone Mode

Phone Mode

1 — Call/Redial/Hold

2 — Phone Signal Strength

3 — Paired Phone

4 — Phone Battery Life

5 — Mute Microphone

6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System

7 — Uconnect Phone Settings

8 — Text Messaging

9 — Direct Dial Pad

10 — Recent Call Log

11 — Browse Phone Book

12 — End Call

MULTIMEDIA 563

9

564 MULTIMEDIA

The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system with voice command cation for further information.

capability. Refer to Voice Recognition (VR) within this publi -

The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands.

NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with compatibility, please visit UconnectPhone.com

.

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile. To check mobile phone

For Uconnect customer support:

• US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com

or call

1-877-855-8400

• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com

or call

1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Phone Mode Activation

Press the PHONE button on the front panel to activate the

Phone mode.

Main Functions

The buttons on the display can be used to:

• Compose phone numbers using the graphic keypad on the display.

• Display and call the contacts in the mobile phone phone book.

• Display and call contacts from the Recent Calls menu.

• Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make access and connection easier and quicker.

• Transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone and vice versa.

• Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the vehicle’s audio system. The system automatically mutes the radio when the Phone function is used.

Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile Phone Or

Bluetooth® Device

Pairing A Phone

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit Uconnect -

Phone.com

for complete mobile phone compatibility infor mation.

NOTE:

• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.

• The vehicle must be in PARK.

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.

• If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up appears asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.

MULTIMEDIA 565

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.

4. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.

• Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.

• Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled. Once tooth® connections.

enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Blue -

Pairing A Phone

9

566 MULTIMEDIA

If No is selected and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Settings button from the Uconnect

Phone main screen.

• Select the Paired Phones button, and then press the

Add Device button on the touchscreen.

• Search for available devices on your Blue tooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the connection request.

5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting.

6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”

7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connec tion request from Uconnect Phone.

• Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number.

8. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting the Yes button will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one

Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.

Uconnect system at a time. If the No button is selected,

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your

Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® settings.

happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,

Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone

Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make sure you have stored the names you want to contact in the phonebook vehicle's hands-free system.

on your mobile phone, so you can call them using the

If your phonebook does not contain any names, enter new names for the most frequently used numbers.

For further details, consult your mobile phone owner's hand book.

NOTE:

The names in the phonebook which do not contain phone empty will not be displayed.

numbers or where both fields (name and surname) are

Connection

The system connects automatically to the paired mobile phone with the highest priority.

To choose a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:

1. Access the Settings menu.

2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.

3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using the corresponding button on the display.

4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® device).

5. Press the Connect button.

6. During the connection stage, a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation.

7. The device connected is highlighted in the list.

MULTIMEDIA 567

Disconnection

To disconnect a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:





5. Press the Disconnect button.

Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth® Audio

Device

To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device from a list, proceed as follows:




9

568 MULTIMEDIA

4. Select the device (mobile phone or Bluetooth® device).

5. Press the Delete Device button.

6. A confirmation screen will appear on the display:

• Press the Yes button to delete the device.

• Press the No button to cancel the operation.

Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth® Audio Device

As A Favorite

To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device as a favorite, proceed as follows:





5. Press the Make Favorite button.

6. The device selected is moved to the top of the list.

Downloading A Phonebook From Your Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,

Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names

(text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® enabled phones with

UconnectPhone.com

for supported phones.

Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. See


Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names

(text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with

Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature.

NOTE:

• If supported, the download and update begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the

Uconnect Phone. For example, after you start the vehicle.

You may be asked for permission to initiate the phonebook download.

• A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.

• Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest down -

loaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.

• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the mobile phonebook.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the

Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to

Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And Recent Calls)

Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to delete the list of recent calls and the phonebook copy.

Making A Phone Call

Dialing The Phone Number Using The "Keyboard" Icon

On The Display

Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad displayed.

MULTIMEDIA 569

Proceed as follows:

1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and use the number buttons to enter the number.

2. Press the Call button to make a call.

Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone Number

1. Push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.

2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full name or phone number).

Recent Calls

The list of the last calls made for each of the following call types can be displayed:

• Calls received

• Calls made

• Calls without a reply

• All calls

To access these types of calls, press the Recent Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.

9

570 MULTIMEDIA

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress

When a phone conversation is active, a second phone call can be made as follows:

• Select the number/contact from the list of recent calls.

• Select the contact from the phonebook.

• Press the Hold button and dial the number using the graphic keyboard of the display.

Redial

To call the number/contact of last call made, press the Redial button.

Answering An Incoming Call

Call Controls

The buttons on the display allow the following phone call functions to be managed:

• Answer

• End

• Ignore

• Put on hold/resume

• Deactivate/activate the microphone

• Transfer the call

• Switch from one call to the other

• Conference/merge two active calls

Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call Currently In

Progress

When an incoming call rings or is announced on the

Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the touch screen, or push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.

Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A Call

Currently In Progress

When an incoming call rings or is announced on the

Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the touch screen, or push the PHONE button on the steering wheel to answer the call and put the ongoing call on hold.

NOTE:

Not all mobile phones may support the management of an incoming call when another phone conversation is active.

Managing Two Phone Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), it is possible to switch between them pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the two calls in a conference pressing the

Merge Calls button.

NOTE:

Check whether the mobile phone in use supports the management of a second call and the "Conference" mode.

Transferring/Call Continuation

Transferring

The ongoing calls can be transferred from the mobile phone to the system and vice versa without ending the call.

To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.

Call Continuation

After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to continue a phone call.

The call continues until it is ended manually or for a maximum period of about 20 minutes.

MULTIMEDIA 571

When the system is switched off, the call is transferred to the mobile phone.

Ending A Call

Press the End button on the touchscreen or the PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to end a call in prog ress.

Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold becomes the new active call.

Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on hold may not be activated automatically.

Uconnect Phone Features

Mute/Unmute

1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND button on the steering wheel.

2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.

9

572 MULTIMEDIA

Reading Messages

The system can read the messages received by the mobile phone.

To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function via Bluetooth®.

If this function is not supported by the phone, the corre sponding message button is deactivated (greyed out) or may only accept incoming messages.

When a text message is received, the display will show a screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.

Press the Message button to access the list of SMS messages received by the mobile phone. The list displays a maximum of 60 messages received.

Browsing SMS

Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.

Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader” using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls.

The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10 SMS messages to be displayed.

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY

Introduction

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

1. Radio

Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter Radio

Mode. The different tuner modes; AM, FM, and SXM can touchscreen in Radio Mode.

be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the

2. Media

Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access me dia sources such as USB Device, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the requested media is present.

3. Climate

Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle” for further details.

MULTIMEDIA 573

4. Apps

Press the Apps button on the touchscreen to access Smart phone and Connected vehicle options.

5. Controls

Press the Controls button on the touchscreen to adjust the heated and vented seats or heated steering wheel (If

Equipped).

6. Phone

Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to access the

Uconnect Phone feature.

7. Settings

Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to access the

Uconnect Settings menu.

9

574 MULTIMEDIA

Drag & Drop Menu Bar

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.

Radio Mode

Radio Controls

The radio is equipped with the following modes:

• AM

• FM

• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped

Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes,

AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in the Radio mode.

Volume/Power Control

Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off the screen and mute the radio. Push the Volume/Power control knob a second time to turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume/

Power control knob clockwise increases the volume, and coun terclockwise decreases it.

Tune/Scroll Control

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station tion.

frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a selec -

Screen Close

The X button on the touchscreen at the top right, provides a means to close the Direct Tune Screen. The Direct Tune seconds.

Screen also auto closes if no activity occurs within a few

Seek And Direct Tune Functions

The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and

Steering Wheel Audio Control up or down.

left of the radio station display or by pressing the left

MULTIMEDIA 575

Seek Up

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Up

Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Down

Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channel at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

9

576 MULTIMEDIA

Direct Tune

Press the Tune button on the touchscreen located at the bottom of the radio screen. The Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired station or channel.

Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.

Undo

You can backspace an entry by pressing the bottom left on the touchscreen.

OK

Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press the OK button, and the Direct Tune screen will close. The system will automatically tune to that station.

The selected Station or Channel number is displayed in the

Direct Tune text box.

Setting Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are acti vated by pressing any of the six Preset buttons on the touch screen, located at the top of the screen.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button hear a confirmation beep.

on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you

The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes.

A set of six presets are visible at the top of the radio screen.

You can switch between the two radio presets by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.

Browse In AM/FM

When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the

ENTER/BROWSE button.

Scrolling Preset List

Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob, or by pressing the

Up and Down arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.

Preset Selection From List

A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset.

When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the

Preset and returns to the main radio screen.

Deleting Presets

A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding Preset.

Return To Main Radio Screen

You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by pressing the X button on the touchscreen when in the Browse Presets screen.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If Equipped

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.

SiriusXM® All Access Package

All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access package, providing over

MULTIMEDIA 577

160 channels of the best programming for all the places life takes you.

• In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel available on your radio, including all the premium programming like every NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.

Howard Stern, every NFL® game, every MLB® game,

• On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio subscrip tion included with the All Access trial, you’ll get Siri usXM® on your computer, smartphone, or tablet.

Including:

• A huge On Demand catalog

• Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM® Latino – a collec tion of Spanish-language channels

• MySXM – allowing you to personalize your favorite music channels

Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more information

SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automati cally renew and bill at then-current rates until you call Siri usXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer

Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com

. All

9

578 MULTIMEDIA

fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the

48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our

Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK. © 2019 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Siri usXM® Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca

.

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.

If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal. In underground parking garages or tunnels.

most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in

No Subscription

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, require a subscrip tion to the SiriusXM® Service. When the Radio does not have

Pre-View channel only.

the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the

Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription

To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, U.S.

residents call:

1-800-643-2112

Canadian residents call:

1-877-438-9677

NOTE:

You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.

The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM button on the touchscreen.

When in Satellite mode:

• The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.

• The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the screen.

• The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar.

• The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the center.

• The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the

Channel Number.

• The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below the

Program Information.

Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct

Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see Presets, browse,

Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.

In addition to the tuning Operation functions common to all

Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather Jump, and fav button functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.

Replay

The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio.

Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.

Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.

You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touch screen, any time during the Replay mode.

MULTIMEDIA 579

Play/Pause

Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be touchscreen.

resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the

Rewind

Press the RW button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the which the press is released.

content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at

Forward

Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can not be done for live content. A continuous press of the FW button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.

9

580 MULTIMEDIA

Live

Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume playing of Live content.

Favorites

Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to activate the favor ites menu, which will time out in five seconds in absence of user interaction.

You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X in the top right corner.

The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist, or song that is currently playing. The Radio then uses this infor mation to alert you when either the favorite song, or favorite

Channels.

artist are being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®

The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the

Radio is 50.

Fav. Artist:

While the song is playing to set a Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav.

Artist button on the touchscreen.

Fav. Song:

While the song is playing to set a Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav

Song button on the touchscreen.

Browse In SXM

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets,

Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.

This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back

Arrow.

All

Press the All button at the left of the Browse Screen.

Channel List

Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all the Siri usXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side

TUNE/SCROLL knob.

of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the

Genre

Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of

Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing the

Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the selected Genre.

Presets

Press the Presets button located at the left of the Browse screen.

You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up and down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.

Preset Selection

A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset.

When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the

Preset, and returns to the main Radio screen.

Deleting A Preset

A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the corresponding Preset.

MULTIMEDIA 581

Favorites

Press the Favorites button located at the left of the Browse screen.

The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the

Favorites list.

You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and

Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling well.

can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as

Remove Favorites

Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the

Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.

Alert Settings

Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert

Settings menu allows you to choose from a Visual alert or

Audible and Visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.

9

582 MULTIMEDIA

Game Zone

Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.

On Air

Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.

Select Teams

Press the Select Teams button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.

Remove Selection

Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the

Selections or press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be deleted.

Alert Settings

Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert

Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score update” or both

SiriusXM® channels.

when one or more of your selections is airing on any of the

Featured

Press the Featured button, located on the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides a list of your featured favorite stations.

Audio Settings

Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio main menu or within the Settings main menu, to activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed

Adjusted Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto

Play, and Radio Off With Door.

You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X located at the top right.

Balance & Fade Equalizer

MULTIMEDIA 583

Balance & Fade

Press the Balance & Fade button on the touchscreen to

Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.

Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate the

Equalizer screen.

Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and dragging over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.

9

584 MULTIMEDIA



Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen.

The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from

Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the automatic adjustment of the increases automatically as speed increase to compensate for normal road noise.

audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume

Surround Sound — If Equipped

Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Surround

Sound. Press Off to deactivate this feature.

When Surround Sound is On, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.

Surround Sound

Loudness AUX Volume Offset

MULTIMEDIA 585

Loudness

Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Loudness.

Press Off to deactivate this feature.

When Loudness is On, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.

AUX Volume Offset

Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen.

The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing of the + and

– buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.

9

586 MULTIMEDIA

Auto Play Radio Off With Door

Auto Play

Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to activate the

Auto Play screen.

The Auto Play feature has two settings On and Off. With

Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected device, immediately after it is connect to the radio.

Radio Off With Door

Press the Radio Off With Door button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen.

The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.

Media Mode

USB/iPod® Mode

Overview

USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB Port or by pressing the selecting USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).

Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then

Seek Up /Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection or to return to the is within the first three seconds of the current selection.

beginning of the previous selection if the USB device/iPod®

Browse

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. The left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device/iPod®. If supported by the device, you

Press the desired button on the left side of the screen. The can browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc.

MULTIMEDIA 587

center of the browse window shows items and its sub-func tions, which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and Down to scroll.

buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can also be used

Media Mode

Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB.

Repeat

Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to play the the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.

current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selec tions on the USB/iPod® device in random order to provide touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.

an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the

9

588 MULTIMEDIA

Info

Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info button on the touch screen a second time to cancel this feature.

Tracks

Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indi cated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title.

When in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the Tune/

Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.

Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop up is displayed will close the pop up.

Audio

Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.

AUX Mode

Overview

AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5

mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the display.

Inserting Auxiliary Device

Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable.

Controlling The Auxiliary Device

The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the attached device.

Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of the

NOTE:

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.

MULTIMEDIA 589

Media Mode

Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX.

Audio


BLUETOOTH® MODE

Overview

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the Uconnect System.

Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect

System.

NOTE:

See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone section for more details.

To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then select Bluetooth®.

Bluetooth® Mode

Seek Up /Down

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the is within the first second of the current selection.

beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device

Media Mode

Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.

9

590 MULTIMEDIA

Tracks

If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, press the

Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop up with red arrow and lines above and below the song title.

the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a

Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop up is displayed will close the pop up.

Audio


Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped

Android Auto™

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile may not be available in every region and/or language.

phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may or

Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop™, or higher, powered smart phone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto™, follow the following procedure:

1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.

2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android

Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in, the app will begin to download.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

Android Auto

MULTIMEDIA 591

3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the

“Phone” icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the

Android Auto™ Icon. Android Auto™ should launch, but if it does not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple

CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for the proce dure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can also launch it by touching the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.

Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:

• Google Maps™ for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music

• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication

• Hundred of compatible apps

NOTE:

To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.

9

592 MULTIMEDIA

Signal Strength

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 5.0

Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.

Android™, Android Auto™ and Google Play are trade marks of Google Inc.

Android Auto™ Maps

Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired desti nation by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in

Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.

NOTE:

If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system.

Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command

While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides voice-guided:

• Navigation

• Live traffic information

• Lane guidance

Android Auto Maps

MULTIMEDIA 593

For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/

(U.S. Residents) https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/ auto (Canadian Residents).

For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android or https:// support.google.com/androidauto/.

Android Auto™ Music

Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeart -

Radio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless music on the road.

NOTE:

Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.

Android Auto Music

NOTE:

To see the metadata for the music playing through Android

Auto™, select the Uconnect System’s media screen.

For further information refer to https:// support.google.com/androidauto .

9

594 MULTIMEDIA

Android Auto™ Communication

With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.

specific to the Android Auto™. This will allow you to send

Contacts

Call In Progress

Android Auto™ Apps

The Android Auto™ App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app work with Android Auto™.

downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to

Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.

Apple CarPlay® Integration

NOTE:


phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touch screen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,

Messages, and more.

To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

MULTIMEDIA 595

2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the

“Phone” icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the

Apple CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® should launch, but if not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay®

Tips And Tricks” in this section for the procedure to

Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to launch it.

enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can also touch the

Apple CarPlay®

9

596 MULTIMEDIA

Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:

To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage.

Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen.

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compat ibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of

Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

Apple CarPlay® Phone

With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recogni tion session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.

NOTE:

Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.

wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a Siri session, and

Apple CarPlay® Music

Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and more.

MULTIMEDIA 597

category, by launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by typing in a destination.

Apple CarPlay® Messages

Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to use

Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also able to read messages, as everything is done via voice.

read incoming text messages, but driver’s will not be

Apple CarPlay® Maps

To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your

Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use

Siri to set your desired destination. Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by pressing Destinations and selecting a

Apple CarPlay® Maps

NOTE:

If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navi gation command said launches the built-in Uconnect naviga tion system.

Apple CarPlay® Apps

To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®, you must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app.

9

598 MULTIMEDIA

Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Resi dents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Cana dian Residents) to see the latest list of available apps for

Apple CarPlay®.

Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks

AutoPlay

AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system that automati cally begins playing music off of the connected device, as soon as it is connected. This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio Settings category.

It’s default setting is on.

NOTE:

AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.

AutoShow

AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system that automat ically launches and displays Android Auto™/Apple

CarPlay® when the phone is initially connected to the USB media port. This feature can be turned on and off in the default setting is on.

Uconnect Settings, within the Display Settings category. The

Android Auto Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing

After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone will auto matically pair to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup required every time it is within range, if

Bluetooth® is turned on.

NOTE:

Android Auto™ features cannot be used with Bluetooth®, a both Bluetooth® and USB connections to function, and the connected using Android Auto™.

connected device will be unavailable to other devices when

Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System

It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the

Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/

Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one that will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. However, another device can also audio source, so the passenger can stream music.

be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an

NOTE:

• If using a Samsung device, every time it is connected to a media USB, and there is another device plugged in, you

will need to manually change the configuration of the USB connection in order for the Samsung device to send data.

• The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be unavail able when Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® are in use.

Phone Mode

Overview

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu

1 — Favorite Contacts

2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life

3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone

4 — Siri

5 — Mute Microphone

MULTIMEDIA 599

6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System

7 — Conference Call*

8 — Phone Settings

9 — Text Messaging**

10 — Direct Dial Pad

11 — Recent Call Log

12 — Browse Phone Book Entries

13 — End Call

14 — Call/Redial/Hold

15 — Do Not Disturb

16 — Reply With Text Message

* — Conference Call feature only available on Global System Mobile

(GSM) mobile devices

** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones

[requires Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP) profile]

Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.

Uconnect Phone supports the following features:

Voice Activated Features:

• Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).

• Hands-Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages.

9

600 MULTIMEDIA

• Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages).

• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).

• Calling back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).

• View call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show

Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent

Calls”).

• Searching contacts phone number (“Search for John Smith

Mobile”).

NOTE:

Examples of Voice Commands are provided throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the Voice Command Quick

Reference Section.

Screen Activated Features

• Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.

• Viewing and calling contacts from phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.

• Setting favorite contact phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the main phone screen.

• Viewing and calling contacts from recent call logs.

• Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.

• Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device via the touch screen.

• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly.

NOTE:

Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Blue tooth® for messaging features to work properly.

Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system automatically mutes your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.

For Uconnect customer support:

• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com

or call:

877-855-8400

• Canadian residents - (English) call:

800-465-2001 or (French) call:

800-387-9983

• Visit UconnectPhone.com

Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®

“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features Blue tooth® technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The

Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time.

MULTIMEDIA 601

Uconnect Phone Button

The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the phone mode and make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc.

Uconnect Voice Command Button

The Uconnect Voice Command button on your steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you are already in a call and you want to send tones or make another call.

The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the

Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect Voice

Command section for direction on how to use the button.

The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control.

9

602 MULTIMEDIA

Phone Operation

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu struc ture. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect

Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how

Voice Command works:

1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile”.

2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task.

You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another prompt.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be used.

For example, instead of saying “Call” and then “John command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”

Smith” and then “mobile”, the following compound

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given.

You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands:

“Search Contact” and when asked “John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone

Natural Speech

Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language

Voice Recognition (VR) engine.

Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain system handles fill-in words such as “I would like to.” non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The

The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith”.

For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the ciated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized.

system identifies the topic or context and provides the asso -

The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a ques tion to which the user can respond without pushing the

Voice Command button on your steering wheel.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep.

To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the

Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a with a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if active) on the radio control head.

command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main menu.

You can also push the VR button or Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu.

MULTIMEDIA 603

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit Uconnect -

Phone.com

for complete mobile phone compatibility infor mation.

NOTE:

• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.

• The vehicle must be in PARK.

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.

2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the touch screen.

NOTE:

If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.

9

604 MULTIMEDIA

4. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.

• Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.

• Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled. Once tooth® connections.

enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Blue -

Pairing A Phone

If No is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the “Phone Settings” button from the

Uconnect Phone main screen.

• Select “Paired Phones”, and then press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on request.

the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the connection

5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting.

6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”

7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connec tion request from Uconnect Phone.

NOTE:

Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number.

8. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one

Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the

Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device nect to the Bluetooth® device.

Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system will recon -

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your

Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® settings.

happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first,

Pair Additional Mobile Phones

1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen from the Phone main screen.

2. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA 605

3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.

4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting.

5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range.

NOTE:

For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority phone paired will have the higher priority.

is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest

You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the

Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:

• “Show Paired Phones” or

• “Connect My Phone”

9

606 MULTIMEDIA

Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device

1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.

2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.

3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen.

4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

If there is no device currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear.

5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the

PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.

6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting.

7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This device will take prece dence over other paired devices within range.

NOTE:

For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority device paired will have the higher priority.

is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest

You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices:

• “Show Paired Phones” or

• “Connect My Phone”

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio

Device After Pairing

Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps:

1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Sources button on the touchscreen.

3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular

Audio Device. A pop-up menu will appear, press

“Connect Phone”.

4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.

Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device


2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name.

4. The options pop-up will be displayed.

5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the touchscreen.


Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device


2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device.


MULTIMEDIA 607

5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen.


Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite


2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name.


5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.

6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.

Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Transfer

From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped


Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s phone -

9

608 MULTIMEDIA

book. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access

Profile may support this feature.

See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com

, for supported phones.

• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, follow the procedure in the “Uconnect Voice Recognition

Quick Tips” section.

• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.

• A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.

• Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest down loaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the

Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to

Managing Your Favorites

There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorites.

1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the

+Add favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list.

2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Contacts from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number. Press the down arrow symbol button next to the pop-up select Add to Favorites.

selected number to display the options pop-up. In the

NOTE:

If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite.

To Remove A Favorite

1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the Phone main screen.

2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the contact you want to remove from your favorites. This will bring up the options for that favorite contact.

3. Press Remove from Favs.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect

Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Blue tooth® on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

Ways To Initiate A Phone Call

Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone.

• Redial

• Dial by pressing in the number

• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)

• Favorites

• Mobile Phonebook

• Recent Call Log

• SMS Message Viewer

MULTIMEDIA 609

Dial By Saying A Number

1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin.

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say

“Dial 151-123-4444.”

3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151-123-4444.

Call By Saying A Phonebook Name

1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin.

2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say

“Call John Doe Mobile.”

3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with

John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe.

Call Controls

The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features:

• Answer

• End

• Ignore

9

610 MULTIMEDIA

• Hold/unhold

• Mute/unmute

• Transfer the call to/from the phone

• Swap two active calls

• Join two active calls together

Touch-Tone Number Entry

1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.

3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.

4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter the number and press Call.

If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the steering wheel

(VR, Phone Send, and Phone End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone and say “Send 1234#” or you can say in your mobile phonebook.

“Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored

Recent Calls

You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types:

• All Calls

• Incoming Calls

• Outgoing Calls

• Missed Calls

These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button on the Phone main screen.

You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and say “Show my incoming calls” from any screen and the incoming calls will be displayed.

NOTE:

Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” “Recent”, or

“Missed.”

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently

In Progress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect

Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the can also press the Answer button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.

Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the call. You

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Currently In

Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

phone. Press the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel, answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to

NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

MULTIMEDIA 611

Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

9

612 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold

During an active call, press the Hold button on the Phone main screen.

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress

You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call.

Join Calls

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone End button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and

Redial

Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the VR button and after the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”

The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF.

NOTE:

The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth® connection.

It is recommended to press the Transfer button on the touch screen when leaving the vehicle.

Browsing SMS

Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.

Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader” using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls.

The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10 SMS messages to be displayed.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone

The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your

MULTIMEDIA 613

connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone

And Mobile Phone

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone your mobile phone User's Manual.

and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions described in

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone

Voice Command

For the best performance:

• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch

(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period.

9

614 MULTIMEDIA

Performance is maximized under:

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

• Low Road Noise

• Smooth Road Surface

• Fully Closed Windows

• Dry Weather Condition

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.

You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.

Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not store names in your favor ites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.

Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”

(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).

Even though international dialing for most number combi nations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combi nations may not be supported.

Far End Audio Performance

Audio quality is maximized under:

• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting

• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed

• Low Road Noise

• Smooth Road Surface

• Fully Closed Windows

• Dry Weather Conditions

• Operation From The Driver's Seat

Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the

Uconnect Phone.

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

Bluetooth® Communication Link

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the

Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone

Bluetooth® ON mode.

OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/

RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, which provides the vehicle status while operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle of the vehicle (if equipped).

ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll

To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the touchscreen, and then select Off-Road Pages.

1 — Off-Road Pages App

2 — Uconnect Apps Button

Main Menu

MULTIMEDIA 615

9

616 MULTIMEDIA

Off-Road Pages Status Bar

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom of

Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the three selectable page options. It provides information for the following items:

• Transfer Case Status

• Latitude/Longitude

• Altitude of the vehicle

• Status of Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in MPH

(km/h)

Status Bar 2WD/4WD

1 — Transfer Case Status

2 — Offroad+ Status

3 — Latitude/Longitude

4 — Altitude

Pitch & Roll

The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch

(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in current vehicle angle.

degrees.The pitch & roll gauge provide a visualization of the

MULTIMEDIA 617

Drivetrain

The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.

The following information is displayed:

• Steering angle in degrees

• Status of Transfer Case

• Status of Front Axles — If Equipped

• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped

9

Pitch And Roll Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Current Pitch

2 — Current Roll

618 MULTIMEDIA

sure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature, and

Battery Voltage.

Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Steering Angle

2 — Sway Bar

3 — Front Axle Locker Status

4 — Rear Axle Locker Status

Accessory Gauge

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pres -

Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Coolant Temperature

2 — Oil Temperature

3 — Oil Pressure

4 — Battery Voltage

5 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission Only)

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume.

of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch

MULTIMEDIA 619

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/USB/

AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will

“Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the

9

620 MULTIMEDIA

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL

The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel, below the climate controls. Behind the media hub access door, the

Media Hub contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and one standard USB Port. Both USB Ports allow you to play through the vehicle’s sound system.

music from MP3 players/smartphones or USB devices

Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may activate

Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if equipped.

For further information, refer to “Android Auto™” or

“Apple CarPlay®” in “Media Mode” in “Uconnect 4 with

7-inch Display” section or in the Owner’s Manual Supple ment.

The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.

NOTE:

• Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and both ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can transfer data to the system at a time. A popup will appear and allow you to select the device transferring data.

• Both ports share a single data connection. The user cannot switch between Type A or Type C.

For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a use.

message will appear and allow you to select which device to

USB Connection

1 — Type A Plugged In

2 — Type C Plugged In

3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In

1 — AUX Port

2 — Type C USB Port

3 — Type A USB Port

Media Hub

MULTIMEDIA 621

Located inside the center console, a second USB Port allows you to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system.

Center Console USB

9

622 MULTIMEDIA

A third and fourth USB port (if equipped) are located behind the center console, above the power inverter. One is a charge

Port allows you to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or

USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system.

only port, and can only charge USB devices. The other USB

Device Plugged In Message Screen

USB On The Back Of The Center Console

1 - Type C And Standard USB USB Ports

2 - Type C and Standard Charge Only USB Ports

When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the USB ports, the following message will display depending on the device being utilized:

Phone Plugged In Message Screen

Phone Or USB Plugged In Message Screen

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external device while driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a collision.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relo cating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not

MULTIMEDIA 623

satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a human body.

manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions,

9

624 MULTIMEDIA

you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.





1. This device may not cause harmful interference.









NOTE:



NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged following measures: to try to correct the interference by one or more of the

1. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.

Uconnect 3

MULTIMEDIA 625

9

Uconnect 4

626 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect

4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system.

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com

to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc tions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the the driver.

middle console above the rearview mirror and aimed at

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, wait until

after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A

Text

2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For

8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions.

3 — Push To End Call

MULTIMEDIA 627

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “

Cancel

” to stop a current voice session

• “

Help

” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• “

Repeat

” to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recogni tion system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen for

Uconnect 3 radio and above the main menu bar for Uconnect

4/4C Nav radios.

9

628 MULTIMEDIA

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required).

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “

Tune to

ninety-five-point-five FM”

• “

Tune to Satellite Channel

Hits 1”

TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say

“

Help

”. The system provides you with a list of commands.

Uconnect 3 Radio

Uconnect 4 Radio

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio

MULTIMEDIA 629

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth® and auxil iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles).

Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to genre.

switch your media source or choose an artist/album/song/

• “

Change source to

Bluetooth®”

• “


iPod®”

• “


USB”

• “

Play artist

Beethoven”; “

Play album

Greatest Hits”;

“

Play song

Moonlight Sonata”; “

Play genre

Classical”

TIP:

Press the

Browse

button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command information is displayed.

must match

exactly

how the artist, album, song and genre

9

630 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 3 Media

Uconnect 4 Media

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with

Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready to make a phone call.

You may have to wait for a few more moments to issue a

Voice Command for hands-free calling. Check Uconnect -

Phone.com

for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the VR button on the steering wheel or Phone button

. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• “

Call

John Smith”

• “

Dial

123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”

• “

Redial

(call

previous outgoing

phone number)”

• “

Call back

(call

previous incoming

phone number)”

TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button on the steering wheel or Phone button and say “

Call

”, then pronounce the name

exactly

as it appears in your phone say “

Call

John Smith

work/home/cell/etc.

” book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can

Uconnect 3 Phone

MULTIMEDIA 631

9

Uconnect 4 Phone

632 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect announces

incoming

text messages. Push the VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “

Listen

”.

(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system).

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the

VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After the beep, say: “

Reply

”.

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

No.

Okay.

Stuck in traffic.

Start without me.

Where are you?

See you later.

I’ll be late.

Call me.

I’ll call you later. I need directions.

I’m on my way.

I’m lost.

Are you there yet?

Can’t talk right now.

I will be

<number> minutes late.

See you in

<number> minutes.

Thanks.

TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com

.

Message Access Profile (MAP)

to take advantage of this

Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading

incoming

text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, follow these four simple steps:

MULTIMEDIA 633

Climate

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.

Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• “

Set driver temperature to

70

degrees

”

• “

Set passenger temperature to

70

degrees

”

TIP:

Voice Command for climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (if equipped).

iPhone® Notification Settings

1 — Select Settings

2 — Select Bluetooth®

3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle

4 — Turn On Show Notifications

TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

9

634 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch Display Climate

MULTIMEDIA 635

Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when the system shows you exactly how to get to where you want to go.

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say: “

Find address

800 Chrysler

Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan” or enter State.

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP:

To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push the VR button

. After the beep, say: “

Find nearest

coffee shop”.

Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation

9

636 MULTIMEDIA

SiriusXM Guardian™ (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped

CAUTION!

Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, including SOS

Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian™, press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touch screen to get started.

NOTE:

SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on properly equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States,

Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

SOS Call

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Send & Go

Vehicle Finder

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn & Lights

Roadside Assistance Call

Vehicle Health Reports**

Vehicle Health Alert**

Performance Pages Plus**

**If vehicle is equipped.

Register (4C/4C NAV)

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.

2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.

3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM

Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will activate vate on the web.

services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to acti -

• US residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian .

• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian .

Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)

Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian™. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement.

MULTIMEDIA 637

Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)

You’re only a few steps away from a connected car experi ence.

Mobile App

9

638 MULTIMEDIA

To use the Uconnect Mobile App:

1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian™ services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile open the app.

device. Use your Owner Account login and password to

2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using

Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.

3. Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a

Finder and Send & Go (if equipped).

location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle

4. Press the Settings side menu button (three horizontal lines) in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings.

NOTE:

For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com

(US

Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents).

SiriusXM® Travel Link (4C NAV)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5-day weather forecast? SiriusXM® Travel

Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for

Uconnect 4 system.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• “

Show fuel prices

”

• “

Show 5-day weather forecast

”

• “

Show extended weather

”

TIP:

Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. Traffic alerts provide you with an alternate route to help you avoid construction or delays from reported traffic incidents. Use reroute.

your touchscreen to accept or decline the recommended

MULTIMEDIA 639

system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone®. Pair your

Siri-enabled device to your Uconnect System. Push and hold, then

release

the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on

Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests.

the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask

SiriusXM Travel Link

Siri® Eyes Free

Available on iPhone® 4s and later

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, select media, place phone calls and much more.

Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The

Uconnect 4 Siri® Eyes Free Available

9

640 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Siri Eyes® Free

Available

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.

• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.

MULTIMEDIA 641

Android Auto™ — If Equipped

NOTE:


phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may or

Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with

Android’s™ best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart phone’s data plan to project your Android™ powered smart phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android

Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Micro phone icon within Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™

VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:

• Maps

• Music

• Phone

• Text Messages

• Additional Apps

Android Auto™ On 7-inch Display

9

642 MULTIMEDIA

Android Auto™ On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to “Android Auto™” in “Media Mode” in the

“Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display” section or the Uconnect

Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android™ 5.0

(Lollipop) or higher and download app on Google Play.

Android™, Android Auto™, and Google Play are trade marks of Google Inc.

Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped

NOTE:


phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or

Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch screen. Connect your iPhone® 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple

MULTIMEDIA 643

CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple commands to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:

CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

• Additional Apps

Apple CarPlay® On 7-inch Display

Apple CarPlay® On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to "Apple Carplay®" in "Media Mode" in "Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display" section or in the Uconnect Owner's

Manual Supplement for further information

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compat ibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of

Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

9

644 MULTIMEDIA





Innovation, Science, and Economic Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.









NOTE:



Additional Information

© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks

Uconnect System Support:

• US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com

or call:

1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)

• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca

or call:

1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)

MULTIMEDIA 645

SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:

• US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:

1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091

9

646

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many autho rized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest infor mation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426-5337

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 647

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: (877) 426-5337

Fax: (787) 782-3345

10

648 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manu facturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication

Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any

TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a

1-800-380-CHRY.

States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by

Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for

Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay

Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty turer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufac service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an

Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract

National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufac turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited and contact the person listed in those documents.

Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained

California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of

FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html

for further information.

MOPAR PARTS

Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.


Mopar has a wide range of accessories to fit your active life style. These Accessories were designed by the same engi neers that created your vehicle, to make it truly yours. From winches to axles, from suspension to the LED off–road lights, these parts have been crafted to meet the needs of enthusiasts like you who demand the very best in capability and style.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme

-

diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA

US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in or FCA US LLC.

individual problems between you, an authorized dealer

10

650 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Adminis

-

trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:/

/www.safercar.gov

.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department imme

-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans

-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the informa tion that students and professional technicians need in diag nosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or compo nents is written in straightforward language with illustra tions, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct prob lems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.


Call toll free at:

•

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

10

652

INDEX

A

About Your Brakes .................................................................501

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .............321

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)...................................459

Adding Fuel.............................................................................360

Additives, Fuel ........................................................................503

Air Bag

Air Bag Operation...............................................................244

Air Bag Warning Light...............................................240, 244

Enhanced Accident Response ...................................257, 435

Event Data Recorder (EDR)...............................................435

Front Air Bag ...............................................................242, 244

If Deployment Occurs ........................................................256

Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................................................253

Maintaining Your Air Bag System....................................259

Maintenance.........................................................................259

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light..................................241

Transporting Pets................................................................276

Air Bag Light ...................................................................240, 278

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................446

Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............................................449

Air Conditioner Refrigerant..........................................449, 450

Air Conditioner System .........................................................449

Air Conditioning.......................................................................82

Air Conditioning Filter.....................................................84, 451

Air Conditioning System .........................................................83

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..........................................83

Air Filter ...................................................................................446

Air Pressure

Tires.......................................................................................477

Alarm

Arm The System....................................................................32

Disarm The System ...............................................................33

Security Alarm.......................................................................32

Alterations/Modifications

Vehicle.....................................................................................15

Android Auto ..........................................................................641

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........................................458, 507

Disposal ................................................................................460

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............................................195

Apple CarPlay .........................................................................642

Assist, Hill Start.......................................................................202

Audio Settings .........................................................................582

Audio Systems (Radio)...........................................................510

Auto Down Power Windows..................................................86

Automatic Dimming Mirror....................................................61

Automatic Door Locks .............................................................40

Automatic Headlights ..............................................................65

11

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)................................83

Automatic Transmission........................................................294

Adding Fluid .......................................................................466

Autostick ..............................................................................300

Fluid And Filter Change ....................................................466

Fluid Change........................................................................466

Fluid Level Check .......................................................465, 466

Fluid Type ....................................................................465, 509

Gear Ranges .........................................................................296

Special Additives.................................................................465

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......................299

Aux Mode ................................................................................588

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)..........................149

Auxiliary Power Outlet..........................................................149

Auxiliary Switches..................................................................152

Axle Fluid.................................................................................509

Axle Lock .................................................................................305

B

Battery.......................................................................................442

Keyless Key Fob Replacement ............................................20

Belts, Seat .................................................................................277

Blind Spot Monitoring............................................................208

Bluetooth

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect

Phone And Mobile Phone..................................................613

653

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio

Device After Pairing............................................................606

Bluetooth Mode.......................................................................589

Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............................................453

B-Pillar Location......................................................................472

Brake Assist System................................................................197

Brake Control System .............................................................196

Brake Fluid.......................................................................462, 509

Brake System....................................................................462, 501

Anti-Lock (ABS)...................................................................501

Fluid Check ..........................................................................462

Master Cylinder...................................................................462

Parking..................................................................................287

Brake/Transmission Interlock ..............................................294

Bulb Replacement ...........................................................394, 396

Bulbs, Light ......................................................................280, 394

Bumper End Cap Removal ....................................................378

C

Camera, Rear............................................................................356

Capacities, Fluid......................................................................507

Caps, Filler

Fuel........................................................................................360

Oil (Engine) ..........................................................................441

Radiator (Coolant Pressure)...............................................460

Car Washes ..............................................................................492

Carbon Monoxide Warning...........................................277, 506

654

Carpeting..................................................................................495

Cellular Phone.........................................................................623

Center High Mounted Stop Light.........................................399

Certification Label...................................................................362

Chains, Tire..............................................................................486

Changing A Flat Tire..............................................................466

Chart, Tire Sizing ....................................................................468

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety........................................276

Checks, Safety..........................................................................276

Child Restraint ........................................................................260

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ........................................................................264

Child Seat Installation ........................................................274

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .........................271

Infant And Child Restraints ..............................................262

Locating The LATCH Anchorages...................................269

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .....................266

Older Children And Child Restraints..............................263

Seating Positions .................................................................265

Clean Air Gasoline..................................................................503

Cleaning

Wheels...................................................................................485

Climate Control

Automatic...............................................................................76

Cold Weather Operation........................................................285

Compact Spare Tire ................................................................484

Connector

UCI ........................................................................................620

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)................................620

Console .....................................................................................143

Floor ......................................................................................143

Contract, Service......................................................................648

Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..................................460

Cooling System........................................................................457

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).............................................459

Coolant Level.......................................................................461

Cooling Capacity.................................................................507

Disposal Of Used Coolant..................................................460

Drain, Flush, And Refill .....................................................458

Inspection .....................................................................458, 461

Points To Remember...........................................................461

Pressure Cap ........................................................................460

Radiator Cap ........................................................................460

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............................458, 507

Corrosion Protection...............................................................491

Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............................................321

Customer Assistance ..............................................................646

Cybersecurity...........................................................................510

D

Daytime Running Lights..........................................................64

Dealer Service ..........................................................................444

Defroster, Windshield ............................................................278

11

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................................................70

Dimmer Switch

Headlight................................................................................65

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine)..........................................................................442

Disable Vehicle Towing .........................................................432

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..............................................460

Disturb......................................................................................611

Do Not Disturb........................................................................640

Door Frame ..............................................................................106

Installation............................................................................106

Removal................................................................................106

Door Locks

Automatic...............................................................................40

Doors...........................................................................................33

Removal............................................................................41, 45

Removal, Front ......................................................................41

Removal, Rear........................................................................45

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................................................49, 50

Driving......................................................................................376

Dual Top.....................................................................................87

E

Electric Brake Control System...............................................196

Anti-Lock Brake System.....................................................195

Electronic Roll Mitigation ..........................................198, 207

655

Electric Remote Mirrors ...........................................................63

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet).........................149

Electrical Power Outlets.........................................................149

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)..........................318

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).........................................198

Emergency

In Case Of .............................................................................388

SOS Emergency Call ...........................................................388

Emergency Brake ....................................................................287

Emergency, In Case Of

Jacking...........................................................................409, 466

Jump Starting.......................................................................423

Tow Hooks ...........................................................................434

Engine .......................................................................................441

Air Cleaner ...........................................................................446

Block Heater.........................................................................286

Break-In Recommendations...............................................287

Compartment.......................................................................441

Compartment Identification..............................................441

Coolant (Antifreeze)............................................................507

Cooling..................................................................................457

Exhaust Gas Caution...................................................277, 506

Fails To Start.........................................................................285

Flooded, Starting .................................................................285

Fuel Requirements ..............................................................507

Jump Starting.......................................................................423

656

Oil..................................................................................444, 507

Oil Filler Cap........................................................................441

Oil Filter................................................................................446

Oil Selection .................................................................444, 507

Oil Synthetic.........................................................................445

Overheating .........................................................................428

Starting..........................................................................281, 282

Engine Oil Viscosity ...............................................................445

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................................................445

Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........................257, 435

Ethanol......................................................................................504

Exhaust Gas Caution ..............................................................277

Exhaust Gas Cautions ............................................................506

Exhaust System ...............................................................277, 456

Exterior Lights...................................................................64, 280

F

Fabric Care ...............................................................................493

Fabric Top ................................................................................493

Filters

Air Cleaner...........................................................................446

Air Conditioning...........................................................84, 451

Engine Oil.....................................................................446, 507

Engine Oil Disposal ............................................................445

Flashers

Hazard Warning..................................................................388

Turn Signal...........................................................................280

Turn Signals .................................................................397, 398

Flash-To-Pass.............................................................................65

Flooded Engine Starting.........................................................285

Fluid Capacities.......................................................................507

Fluid Leaks...............................................................................280

Fluid Level

Manual Transmission .........................................................464

Fluid Level Checks..................................................................463

Brake......................................................................................462

Engine Oil.............................................................................442

Fluid, Brake..............................................................................509

Fluids And Lubricants............................................................507

Fog Lights.................................................................................397

Fog Lights, Service..................................................................397

Fold-Flat Seats ...........................................................................49

Folding Rear Seats.....................................................................52

Folding Windshield ................................................................125

Forward Collision Warning...................................................215

Four Wheel Drive....................................................................302

Operation..............................................................................302

Shifting..................................................................................302

System...................................................................................302

Four-Way Hazard Flasher .....................................................388

Freedom Panels ...................................................................98, 99

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .........................................................430

Front Axle (Differential).........................................................463

11

Fuel............................................................................................503

Adding..................................................................................360

Additives..............................................................................503

Clean Air ..............................................................................503

Ethanol..................................................................................504

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...........................................................360

Gasoline................................................................................503

Materials Added..................................................................503

Methanol...............................................................................504

Octane Rating ..............................................................503, 507

Requirements.......................................................................507

Specifications .......................................................................507

Tank Capacity......................................................................507

Fueling......................................................................................360

Fuses .........................................................................................399

G

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......................................135

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)...............................................360, 361

Gasoline, (Fuel) .......................................................................503

Gasoline, Clean Air.................................................................503

Gasoline, Reformulated .........................................................503

Gear Ranges.....................................................................291, 296

Glass Cleaning.........................................................................499

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................................................364

GVWR.......................................................................................362

657

H

Hard Top ....................................................................................98

Hazard Warning Flashers......................................................388

Head Restraints .........................................................................56

Headlights

Automatic...............................................................................65

Bulb Replacement................................................................396

Cleaning................................................................................491

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ................................65

Lights On Reminder..............................................................67

Passing ....................................................................................65

Replacing..............................................................................396

Heated Mirrors..........................................................................63

Heated Steering Wheel.............................................................60

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch..................65

Hill Start Assist........................................................................202

Hitches

Trailer Towing .....................................................................366

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)........................................135

Hood Prop................................................................................130

Hood Release ...........................................................................130

I

Ignition........................................................................................23

Switch......................................................................................23

In Case Of Emergency ............................................................388

658

In Vehicle Help

Vehicle User Guide...............................................................16

Inside Rearview Mirror............................................................61

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..........................................499

Integrated Power Module (Fuses)........................................400

Interior And Instrument Lights ..............................................68

Interior Appearance Care ......................................................495

Interior Lights............................................................................68

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ......................................70

Introduction...............................................................................13

Inverter

Power....................................................................................150

iPod/USB/MP3 Control........................................................587

J

Jack Location............................................................................409

Jack Operation.................................................................416, 466

Jacking Instructions ................................................................416

Jump Starting...........................................................................423

K

Key Fob

Arm The System....................................................................32

Disarm The System...............................................................33

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...................................21

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry).................20

Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..................21

Key-In Reminder.......................................................................24

Keyless Enter-N-Go ..................................................................36

Passive Entry..........................................................................36

Keys.............................................................................................18

Replacement.....................................................................21, 31

L

Lane Change Assist...................................................................67

Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................................231

Latches ......................................................................................280

Hood......................................................................................130

Leaks, Fluid..............................................................................280

Life Of Tires .............................................................................480

Light Bulbs .......................................................................280, 394

Lights ........................................................................................280

Air Bag ..........................................................................240, 278

Automatic Headlights ..........................................................65

Brake Assist Warning .........................................................202

Bulb Replacement................................................................396

Center Mounted Stop..........................................................399

Daytime Running ..................................................................64

Dimmer Switch, Headlight..................................................65

Exterior............................................................................64, 280

Fog.........................................................................................397

Hazard Warning Flasher....................................................388

Headlights ............................................................................396

High Beam..............................................................................65

High Beam/Low Beam Select .............................................65

11

Interior ....................................................................................68

Lights On Reminder .............................................................67

Passing....................................................................................65

Rear Servicing......................................................................398

Rear Tail Lamps...................................................................398

Service...................................................................................396

Side Marker..........................................................................398

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).....................................219

Traction Control ..................................................................202

Turn Signal...........................................................................280

Turn Signals .................................................................397, 398

Loading Vehicle ......................................................................362

Tires.......................................................................................472

Locking

Axle .......................................................................................305

Locks

Automatic Door.....................................................................40

Child Protection ....................................................................40

Power Door............................................................................35

Low Tire Pressure System .....................................................219

Lubrication, Body ...................................................................453

Lug Nuts/Bolts .......................................................................501

Luggage Carrier ......................................................................162

M

Maintenance Free Battery ......................................................442

Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................436

659

Manual

Park Release .........................................................................429

Service...................................................................................650

Manual Transmission .....................................................289, 464

Fluid Level Check................................................................464

Lubricant Selection......................................................464, 509

Shift Speeds..........................................................................291

Methanol...................................................................................504

Mirrors........................................................................................61

Automatic Dimming.............................................................61

Electric Powered....................................................................63

Electric Remote......................................................................63

Heated.....................................................................................63

Outside....................................................................................62

Rearview.................................................................................61

Vanity......................................................................................64

Modifications/Alterations

Vehicle.....................................................................................15

Monitor, Tire Pressure System..............................................219

Mopar Parts..............................................................................649

N

New Vehicle Break-In Period................................................287

O

Occupant Restraints................................................................228

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)......................................503, 507

Oil Filter, Change....................................................................446

660

Oil Filter, Selection..................................................................446

Oil, Engine .......................................................................444, 507

Capacity................................................................................507

Change Interval...................................................................444

Dipstick.................................................................................442

Disposal ................................................................................445

Filter ..............................................................................446, 507

Filter Disposal......................................................................445

Identification Logo..............................................................445

Materials Added To............................................................445

Recommendation ........................................................444, 507

Synthetic ...............................................................................445

Viscosity .......................................................................445, 507

Operator Manual

Owner's Manual............................................................14, 650

Outside Rearview Mirrors.......................................................62

Overheating, Engine...............................................................428

P

Paint Care.................................................................................491

Parking Brake ..........................................................................287

ParkSense System, Rear .........................................................342

Passive Entry .............................................................................36

Pets............................................................................................276

Placard, Tire And Loading Information..............................472

Power

Brakes....................................................................................501

Door Locks .............................................................................35

Inverter..................................................................................150

Mirrors ....................................................................................63

Steering .................................................................................309

Windows.................................................................................85

Power Steering Fluid ..............................................................509

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........................................236

Pretensioners

Seat Belts...............................................................................237

R

Radial Ply Tires .......................................................................478

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)..................................460

Radio

Presets ...................................................................................576

Radio Operation ..............................................................574, 623

Rear Axle (Differential) ..........................................................463

Rear Camera.............................................................................356

Rear Cross Path .......................................................................213

Rear ParkSense System ..........................................................342

Recreational Towing...............................................................373

Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)...........................374

Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....................375

Reformulated Gasoline...........................................................503

Refrigerant................................................................................450

Release, Hood ..........................................................................130

Reminder, Seat Belt.................................................................229

11

Remote Control

Starting System......................................................................26

Remote Keyless Entry

Arm The Alarm .....................................................................32

Disarm The Alarm ................................................................33

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...................................21

Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...............................619

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode .......................................................28

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features...................29

Uconnect Settings..................................................................29

Remote Starting System...........................................................26

Removable Doors................................................................41, 45

Front........................................................................................41

Rear .........................................................................................45

Removing ...................................................................................87

Replacement Bulbs .................................................................394

Replacement Keys...............................................................21, 31

Replacement Tires...................................................................481

Reporting Safety Defects........................................................649

Restraints, Child......................................................................260

Restraints, Head........................................................................56

Roll Over Warning....................................................................14

Roof Type Carrier ...................................................................162

Rotation, Tires .........................................................................487

661

S

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................................................277

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle..............................................280

Safety Defects, Reporting.......................................................649

Safety Information, Tire .........................................................466

Safety Tips................................................................................276

Safety, Exhaust Gas.................................................................277

Schedule, Maintenance...........................................................436

Seat Belts...........................................................................229, 277

Adjustable Shoulder Belt....................................................235

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage...........................235

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage...................235

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ................................237

Child Restraints ...................................................................260

Energy Management Feature ............................................237

Extender................................................................................236

Front Seat..............................................................229, 231, 233

Inspection .............................................................................277

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation............................................233

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting..........................................234

Lap/Shoulder Belts.............................................................231

Operating Instructions........................................................233

Pregnant Women.................................................................236

Pretensioners........................................................................237

Rear Seat ...............................................................................231

662

Reminder..............................................................................229

Seat Belt Extender ...............................................................236

Seat Belt Pretensioner.........................................................237

Untwisting Procedure ........................................................234

Seat Belts Maintenance...........................................................498

Seats ............................................................................................49

Adjustment.............................................................................49

Height Adjustment ...............................................................50

Rear Folding...........................................................................49

Tilting......................................................................................49

Security Alarm ..........................................................................32

Arm The System....................................................................32

Disarm The System...............................................................33

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).........................................507

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ........................................................30

Sentry Key Replacement....................................................21, 31

Service Assistance...................................................................646

Service Contract ......................................................................648

Service Manuals ......................................................................650

Shifting .....................................................................................293

Automatic Transmission............................................293, 294

Manual Transmission.........................................................289

Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case

Neutral (N)...........................................................................374

Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case

Neutral (N)...........................................................................375

Shoulder Belts..........................................................................231

Side Step Removal ..................................................................377

Signals, Turn............................................................280, 397, 398

Siri..............................................................................................639

Sirius Satellite Radio...............................................................577

Favorites ...............................................................................580

Replay ...................................................................................579

SiriusXM Guardian

Vehicle Health Alert ...........................................................637

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Browse in SXM.....................................................................580

Favorites ...............................................................................580

Replay ...................................................................................579

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................................................486

Snow Tires................................................................................483

Soft Top...............................................................................87, 117

Soft Top Windows ..................................................................117

Spare Tires........................................................412, 483, 484, 485

Spark Plugs ..............................................................................507

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline).....................................................................507

Oil ..........................................................................................507

11

Speed Control

Accel/Decel..........................................................................320

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................................................327

Cancel....................................................................................321

Resume .................................................................................321

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................................318, 321

Starting .............................................................................281, 282

Automatic Transmission....................................................281

Button......................................................................................23

Cold Weather.......................................................................285

Engine Block Heater ...........................................................286

Engine Fails To Start...........................................................285

Manual Transmission.........................................................281

Remote....................................................................................26

Starting And Operating .........................................................282

Starting Procedures ................................................................282

Steering.......................................................................................59

Power....................................................................................309

Tilt Column............................................................................59

Wheel, Heated .......................................................................60

Wheel, Tilt ..............................................................................59

Steering Wheel Audio Controls............................................619

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls.............619

Stop/Start.........................................................................310, 314

Storage ..............................................................................117, 142

Storage, Vehicle.................................................................84, 489

663

Store Radio Presets .................................................................576

Storing Your Vehicle...............................................................489

Stuck, Freeing ..........................................................................430

Sway Bar Disconnect

Electronic ..............................................................................306

Sway Control, Trailer .............................................................207

Synthetic Engine Oil ...............................................................445

System, Remote Starting ..........................................................26

T

Tailgate .....................................................................................131

Telescoping Steering Column .................................................59

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...............................83

Tilt Steering Column ................................................................59

Tire And Loading Information Placard ...............................472

Tire Markings ..........................................................................467

Tire Safety Information ..........................................................466

Tires...................................................................280, 476, 483, 488

Aging (Life Of Tires)...........................................................480

Air Pressure..........................................................................476

Chains ...................................................................................486

Changing ......................................................................409, 466

Compact Spare.....................................................................484

General Information....................................................476, 483

High Speed...........................................................................478

Inflation Pressure ................................................................477

Jacking...................................................................................466

664

Life Of Tires .........................................................................480

Load Capacity..............................................................472, 473

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...............................219

Quality Grading ..................................................................488

Radial....................................................................................478

Replacement.........................................................................481

Rotation ................................................................................487

Safety.............................................................................466, 476

Sizes.......................................................................................468

Snow Tires............................................................................483

Spare Tires....................................................412, 483, 484, 485

Spinning................................................................................479

Tread Wear Indicators........................................................480

Wheel Nut Torque ..............................................................501

To Open Hood.........................................................................130

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight............................................369

Top

Dual.........................................................................................87

Freedom..................................................................................98

Hard ........................................................................................98

Soft.........................................................................................110

Tow Hooks

Emergency............................................................................434

Towing......................................................................363, 366, 432

Disabled Vehicle..................................................................432

Recreational..........................................................................373

Weight...................................................................................366

Towing Behind A Motorhome ..............................................373

Trac-Lok

Rear Axle ..............................................................................305

Traction Control ......................................................................207

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...................................................207

Trailer Towing.........................................................................363

Cooling System Tips ...........................................................372

Hitches ..................................................................................366

Trailer And Tongue Weight.......................................366, 369

Wiring ...................................................................................370

Trailer Towing Guide.............................................................366

Trailer Weight..........................................................................366

Transfer Case ...........................................................................464

Fluid ......................................................................................509

Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation............................................302

Maintenance.........................................................................464

Transmission............................................................................294

Automatic.....................................................................294, 465

Fluid ......................................................................................509

Maintenance.........................................................................465

Manual..................................................................................289

Shifting..................................................................................293

Transporting Pets....................................................................276

Tread Wear Indicators............................................................480

Turn Signals .....................................................................397, 398

11

U

UCI Connector.........................................................................620

Uconnect

Advanced Phone Connectivity .........................................613

Phone Call Features ............................................................609

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect

Phone ....................................................................................613

Uconnect Settings..................................................................29

Uconnect Phone ......................................602, 603, 605, 606, 607

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Currently

In Progress............................................................................611

Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call

Currently In Progress .........................................................611

Bluetooth Communication Link .......................................615

Call By Saying A Phonebook Name.................................609

Call Continuation................................................572, 612, 613

Call Controls ........................................................................609

Call Termination .................................................................612

Cancel Command................................................................603

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect

Phone And Mobile Phone..................................................613

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio

Device After Pairing ...........................................................606

Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device.................................607

Dial By Saying A Number .................................................609

665

Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device.......................607

Far End Audio Performance..............................................614

Help Command ...................................................................603

Join Calls...............................................................................612

Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite...............607

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In

Progress ................................................................................612

Managing Your Favorites...................................................608

Natural Speech.....................................................................602

Operation..............................................................................602

Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone............603

Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device......................606

Pair Additional Mobile Phones.........................................605

Phonebook Download........................................................607

Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ....................................612

Power-Up .............................................................................615

Recent Calls..........................................................................610

Redial ....................................................................................612

To Remove A Favorite........................................................608

Toggling Between Calls......................................................612

Touch-Tone Number Entry................................................610

Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ......................613

Voice Command..................................................................613

Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ..........................................609

666

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features...............................29, 36

Passive Entry Programming................................................36

Uniform Tire Quality Grades................................................488

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector................620

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...........................................234

V

Vanity Mirrors...........................................................................64

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..................................500

Vehicle Loading ..............................................................362, 473

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.........................................15

Vehicle Storage..................................................................84, 489

Vehicle User Guide

In Vehicle Help......................................................................16

Navigation..............................................................................16

Operating Instructions .........................................................16

Searching User Guide...........................................................16

Viscosity, Engine Oil ..............................................................445

Voice Command......................................................................625

Voice Recognition System (VR) ............................................625

W

Warnings And Cautions ..........................................................15

Warnings, Roll Over .................................................................14

Warranty Information ............................................................649

Washers, Windshield..............................................................442

Washing Vehicle......................................................................492

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care..................................................485

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .................................................485

Wind Buffeting ..........................................................................86

Window Fogging.......................................................................84

Window Storage......................................................................117

Windows ....................................................................................85

Power ......................................................................................85

Windshield

Folding..................................................................................125

Windshield Defroster .............................................................278

Windshield Washers.........................................................69, 442

Fluid ......................................................................................442

Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................................453

Windshield Wipers ...................................................................69

Wipers Blade Replacement....................................................453

11

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle .

©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

©2019 FCA US LLC. Tous droits réservés. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.

App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

20_JT_OM_EN_USC

All-New

Gladiator

First Edition V3

Owner’s Manual